Sonic Alert Clock Radio DCP301 User Manual

DCP301  
Digital Program Controller  
User’s Manual  
EN1I-6197  
Issue 7 (02/04)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARRANTY  
The Honeywell device described herein has been manufactured and  
tested for corrent operation and is warranted for a period of one year.  
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE  
If you encounter a problem with your unit, please review all the  
configuration data to verify that your selections are consistent with  
your application; (i.e. Inputs, Outputs, Alarms, Limits, etc.). If the  
problem persists after checking the above parameters, you can get  
technical assistance by calling the following:  
In the U.S.A. ・・・・・1-800-423-9883  
In Europe ・・・・・・・Your local branch office  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
About Icons  
Safety precautions are for ensuring safe and correct use of this product, and for  
preventing injury to the operator and other people or damage to property. You must  
observe these safety precautions. The safety precautions described in this manual  
are indicated by various icons.  
The following describes the icons and their meanings. Be sure to read and  
understand the following descriptions before reading this manual.  
Warnings are indicated when mishandling this product might  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
result in death or serious injury to the user.  
Cautions are indicated when mishandling this product might  
result in minor injury to the user, or only physical damage to  
this product.  
Examples  
Triangles warn the user of a possible danger that may be caused by  
wrongful operation or misuse of this product.  
These icons graphically represent the actual danger. (The example on  
the left warns the user of the danger of electric shock.)  
White circles with a diagonal bar notify the user that specific actions are  
prohibited to prevent possible danger.  
These icons graphically represent the actual prohibited action. (The  
example on the left notifies the user that disassembly is prohibited.)  
Black filled-in circles instruct the user to carry out a specific obligatory  
action to prevent possible danger.  
These icons graphically represent the actual action to be carried out.  
(The example on the left instructs the user to remove the plug from the  
outlet.)  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
Before connecting the DCP301 to the measurement target or external con-  
trol circuits, make sure that the FG terminal is properly grounded (100  
max.).  
Failure to do so might cause electric shock or fire.  
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power  
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.  
Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power terminals. Doing  
so might cause electric shock.  
Do not disassemble the DCP301. Doing so might cause electric shock or  
faulty operation.  
CAUTION  
Use the DCP301 within the operating ranges recommended in the specifica-  
tions (temperature, humidity, voltage, vibration, shock, mounting direction,  
atmosphere, etc.). Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation.  
Do not block ventilation holes. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.  
Wire the DCP301 properly according to predetermined standards. Also wire  
the DCP301 using designed power leads according to recognized installa-  
tion methods.  
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.  
Do not allow lead clippings, chips or water to enter the controller case.  
Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.  
Inputs to the current input terminals (31) and (33) on the DCP301 should be  
within the current and voltage ranges listed in the specifications.  
Firmly tighten the terminal screws at the torque listed in the specifications.  
Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause electric shock or fire.  
Do not use unused terminals on the DCP301 as relay terminals.  
Doing so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.  
We recommend attaching the terminal cover (sold separately) after wiring  
the DCP301. Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty opera-  
tion.  
Use the relays on the DCP301 within the service life listed in the specifica-  
tions.  
Continued use of the relays after the recommended service life might cause  
fire or faulty operation.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
Use induced lighting surge preventive device if there is the risk of power  
surges caused by lightning.  
Failure to do might cause fire or faulty operation.  
Before replacing the battery, be sure to turn the power OFF. Failure to do so  
might cause electric shock.  
Do not touch internal components immediately after turning the power OFF  
to replace the battery. Doing so might cause burns.  
Do not insert the battery with the polarities (+,-) reversed.  
Do not use damaged (broken battery skin, leaking battery fluid) batteries.  
Do not throw batteries into fires, or charge, short-circuit, disassemble or  
heat batteries.  
Store batteries in low-temperature, dry locations.  
Failure to observe the above cautions may cause batteries to emit heat or  
split, or battery fluid to lead.  
Store batteries out of the reach of small children.  
Batteries are small and are easy to swallow. If a child swallows a battery,  
consult a physician immediately.  
Return used batteries to Honeywell sales/service office or your dealer. When  
disposing of used batteries at the user site, observe local by laws.  
Handling Precautions  
After turning the power ON, do not operate the DCP301 for at least 15s  
to allow the DCP301 to stabilize.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unpacking  
Check the following when removing the DCP301 from its package.  
1. Check the model No. to make sure that you have received the product that you ordered.  
2. Check the DCP301 for any apparent physical damage.  
3. Check the contents of the package against the Package List to make sure that all accessories are included  
in the package.  
After unpacking, handle the DCP301 and its accessories taking care to prevent damage or loss of parts.  
If an inconsistency is found or the package contents are not in order, immediately contact your dealer.  
Product List  
Name  
Model No.  
Q’ty  
Remarks  
Body  
1
See 1-5 How Model Nos.  
Are Configured, page 1-5.  
Mounting bracket  
User's Manual  
81405411-001  
EN1I-6197  
The Model No. is the parts  
No. for two installation tools.  
1 set (2)  
1
This manual  
XX  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XX  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XX  
X
U
al  
u
X
X
an  
s
M
ser  
1
Unit indicator label  
(SI units)  
N-3132  
Request  
The filter on the front of the controller is Covered with a protective film to protect the surface of the controller.  
When you have finished mounting and wiring the controller, fix cellophane adhesive tape on the corners of the  
filter, and pull in the direction of the arrow to peel off the protective film.  
Pull towards you.  
Handling Precautions  
Peeling off the protective film with your fingernail might scratch the  
surface of the controller.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Organization of This Users Manual  
This manual is organized as follows.  
Chapter 1. GENERAL  
This chapter describes DCP301 applications, features and basic function blocks. It  
also gives a list of model numbers.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
This chapter describes the names and functions of DCP301 parts, input types and  
range Nos.  
Chapter 3. MOUNTING  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
This chapter describes how to mount the DCP301 on control panels. This chapter  
is required reading for designers of control systems using the DCP301.  
This chapter describes the precautions when wiring the DCP301 to a control  
system and how to wire the DCP301. This chapter is required reading for  
designers of control systems and supervisors of wiring work.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
This chapter describes the functions of the controller. This chapter is required  
reading for designers of control systems using the DCP301.  
This chapter describes how to switch the basic display states of the DCP301, and  
select and run programs. This chapter is required reading for designers of control  
systems using the DCP301 and users of the DCP301.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
This chapter describes how to set up parameters on the controller and the meaning  
of settings.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
This chapter describes how to set up programs on the controller and the meanings  
of settings.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
This chapter describes points to check when the DCP301 is not working properly  
or how to remedy trouble that might occur.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
This chapter describes the general specifications, performance specifications and  
external dimensions of the DCP301.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
This chapter describes calibration procedures for the functions of the DCP301.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Safety Precautions  
Unpacking  
Request  
Organization of the Product Manual  
Conventions Used in This Manual  
Chapter 1. GENERAL  
1-1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
1-2 Basic Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
1-3 Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
1-4 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
System configuration by CPL communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
1-5 Model Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Model selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
2-1 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
2-2 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Functions using two or more keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Loader jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
2-3 Input Type and Range No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Chapter 3. MOUNTING  
3-1 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
3-2 Panel Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
3-3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Mounting locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Noise generating sources and countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Dust-proof cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Mounting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-1 Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
4-2 Compensating Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
4-3 Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
4-4 Layout of Terminals and Recommended Lead Draw-out Direction. . . . . . . 4-5  
4-5 Connecting the Ground and Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
4-6 Wiring of Standard and Add-on Terminal Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Standard terminal layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Add-on terminal layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7 Connecting Inputs (analog inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Connecting input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
4-8 Connecting control outputs (outputs 1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Relay output (0D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Current output (5G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Position-proportional output (2G). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Voltage output (6D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Heat/cool output (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Heat/cool output (5K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
4-9 Connecting auxiliary outputs (outputs 2, 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
0D, 5G, 6D auxiliary outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
2G, 3D, 5K auxiliary outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
4-10 Connecting Event Output (relay output). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
4-11 Connecting Time Event Output (open-collector). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
4-12 Connecting External Switch (RSW) Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
4-13 Connecting for Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
RS-485 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
4-14 Isolating Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Control outputs 0D, 5G, 6D, 3D, 5K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Control output 2G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
5-1 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
5-2 Program Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Events 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Time events 1 to 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
PID set selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
G.Soak (guarantee soak) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
PV start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Pattern link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
5-3 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Mode type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Mode transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
Mode transition operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Mode transition limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
5-4 Controller and Programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16  
5-5 Input Processing Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17  
5-6 Output Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18  
Control output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18  
SP output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22  
Auxiliary output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
6-1 Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
6-2 Switching the Basic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2 Copying Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14  
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14  
8-3 General Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
9-1 Self-diagnostics and Alarm Code Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Self-diagnostics at power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Self-diagnostics at each sampling cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Intermittent self-diagnostics during operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Self-diagnostics only when certain functions are operating . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Alarm code display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Alarm categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
9-2 Trouble during Key Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
PROG  
The program No. does not change by pressing  
in basic display  
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
The program No. does not change by pressing in the basic  
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
RUN/HOLD  
The controller does not change to RUN mode by pressing  
in  
the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
RUN/HOLD  
The controller does not change to HOLD mode by pressing  
in  
the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
PROG  
RUN/HOLD  
The controller cannot be reset by pressing  
+
in the basic  
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
PROG  
DISP  
The program is not advanced by pressing  
+
in the basic  
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
FUNC  
The controller does not change to FAST mode by pressing  
+
in the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
A/M  
The controller does not change to MANUAL mode by pressing  
in the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
A/M  
The controller does not change to AUTO mode by pressing  
in  
the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
AT  
Auto-tuning (AT) is not started by pressing  
in the basic display  
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
AT  
Auto-tuning (AT) is not canceled by pressing  
in the basic display  
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
PARA  
Setting group other than p a R ais not displayed by pressing  
by selecting the setting group in parameter set state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
PARA  
Setting group other than S e tis not displayed by pressing  
by  
selecting the setting group in parameter set state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
ENT  
The controller does not enter the setting entry state by pressing  
in the parameter setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
The controller does not change to setup group selection state and  
PARA  
setting entry state continues by pressing  
in parameter setting  
entry state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
The controller does not change to program setup state by pressing  
FUNC  
PROG  
+
in the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
The controller does not change to the setting entry state by pressing  
ENT  
in the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Items cannot be changed by pressing  
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Event items cannot be changed by repeatedly pressing in  
program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Time events cannot be changed by repeatedly pressing in  
program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
PID set items cannot be changed by repeatedly pressing in  
program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
G.Soak items cannot be changed by repeatedly pressing in  
,
in program setup  
,
,
,
,
program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
PV start items, cycle items and pattern link items cannot be displayed  
by repeatedly pressing  
,
in program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Insertion/deletion of segments cannot be confirmed by pressing  
FUNC  
ENT  
+
in program setup state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
CLR  
FUNC  
Program deletion cannot be confirmed by pressing  
+
while  
entering pattern items in program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
PROG  
The program cannot be copied by pressing  
+
in the basic  
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
CLR  
FUNC  
DISP  
General reset is not applied by pressing  
+
+
in the basic  
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
9-3 Motor Adjustment is Impossible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Normal wiring for direct motor rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Normal wiring for reverse motor rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Alarm display caused by wrong wiring and causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
9-4 Replacing the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
BAT LED blinking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
Items to prepare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
Replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
10-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1  
Accessories/option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
10-2 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
Soft dust-proof cover set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Hard dust-proof cover set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Terminal cover set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
Precautions before calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1  
Equipment needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1  
11-1 Quick Reference Table for Calibration Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
11-2 Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
Enter calibration mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
Function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7  
PV calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10  
Cold junction sensor calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12  
Current output calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12  
Index  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conventions Used in This Manual  
The following conventions are used in this manual.  
Handling Precautions  
: Handling Precautions indicate items that the user should pay attention  
to when handling the DCP301.  
Note  
: Notes indicate useful information that the user might benefit by  
knowing.  
DISP  
: These icons represent keys on the DCP301’s console.  
PROG  
RUN/HOLD  
RUN/HOLD  
+
: Combinations of icons like these indicate that  
must be pressed  
PROG  
while holding  
down.  
(1) (2) (3)  
>>  
: The numbers with the parenthesis indicate steps in a sequence or  
indicate corresponding parts in an explanation.  
: Indicates the controller state after an operation.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. GENERAL  
1-1 Features  
The DCP301 is a general-purpose single-loop program controller for controlling temperature, pressure, flow rate and  
other inputs.  
G High accuracy achieved by multi-range input  
Multi-range input allows you to choose between the following input types: thermocouple,  
resistance temperature detector (RTD), dc voltage and dc current. Accuracy of ±0.1%FS±1  
digit and a sampling cycle of 0.1s ensures consistently high-precision control.  
G Wide range of control output types  
A wide range of models supporting various control output types are available: relay time-  
proportional output, position-proportional output, current output, voltage time-propor-  
tional output, and heat/cool output.  
On models other than heat-cool control output, you can also choose neural net-based  
auto-tuning and smart-tuning for inhibiting overshoot, in addition 2 degrees of freedom  
PID.  
G Enhanced compatibility with PLC  
12 external switch inputs (eight optional), three event outputs and five time event outputs  
(optional) ensure compatibility with automating systems designed around a PLC core.  
G Easy operation  
PARA  
Up to eight frequently changed parameter setups can be registered to the  
tating recall of item setups.  
key, facili-  
If the Smart Loader Package (sold separately) is used together with the DCP301, pro-  
grams and parameters can be set up on a personal computer.  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. GENERAL  
1-2 Basic Function Blocks  
Input  
Outputs  
Control Operation Block  
• Square root  
extraction  
• Output change  
limitter  
• Upper/lower  
limitter  
• Thermocouple  
• Resistance  
temperature detector  
• dc current  
• Current  
• Relay  
• Voltage  
• Position-proportional  
• Heat-cool  
• Mode transition  
Lineariza-  
tion table  
approxima-  
tion  
• PID control  
• Auto-tuning  
• Neuro & Fuzzy  
• Forward/reverse action  
• ON-OFF control  
• SP output  
• dc voltage  
• Bias  
• Filter  
4 external switch inputs  
Event Outputs  
• RUN  
• PV  
• SP  
• Deviation  
• MV  
• SP limit  
• SP bias  
• HOLD  
• RESET  
• ADV  
• MFB  
• Modes  
• Alarm  
*
8 external switch inputs  
• Program No.  
• FAST  
• PV start  
• AUTO/MANUAL  
• AT  
• G.Soak cancel  
• Direct/reverse action  
*
*
Time Event Outputs  
• Time event  
• Segment code  
Key operation  
Auxiliary Outputs  
• Display selection  
• Program No.  
• RUN/HOLD  
• RESET  
• ADV  
• FAST  
• PV  
• SP  
• Deviation  
• MV  
• MFB  
• AUTO/MANUAL  
• AT  
• Program setup  
• Parameter setup  
*
CPL communications I/O  
MFB input  
Loader communications I/O  
Parameters  
Program  
• Variable parameters  
• Event configuration  
• PID parameters (8 sets)  
• Setup  
• 19 patterns x 30 segments  
• Events  
• Time events  
• PID sets  
• Tables  
• G.Soak  
• Constant-value operation  
• PV start  
• Cycle  
* indicates options.  
• Pattern link  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. GENERAL  
1-3 Data Structure  
Data is made up of “parameters” that are used mainly for setting controller functions and “programs” that are used for  
setting operation during program operation of the controller.  
• Total of 19 program patterns  
Program No.=19 Number of segments=8  
(3)  
SP  
(4)  
(2)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
Program No.=3 Number of segments=15  
SP  
(8)  
(12)  
Program No.=2 Number of segments=19  
Time  
(13)  
(14)  
(15)  
Program No.=1 Number of segments=6  
SP  
(5)  
(4)  
(18)  
(19)  
Time  
(3)  
(6)  
(2)  
(1)  
Time  
Time  
• Parameters  
Variable parameters  
Event configuration data  
PID parameters  
Setup data  
Table data  
Constant-value operation data  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. GENERAL  
1-4 System Configuration  
G System configuration by CPL communications  
On DCP301 models supporting RS-485 communications (optional), controllers can be  
connected as slave stations on a communications network.  
Personal computer (master station)  
RS-232C  
RS-232C/RS-485 converter  
RS-485  
DCP301 (slave station)  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. GENERAL  
1-5 Model Numbers  
G Model selection guide  
Basic  
Model Output Function Power Option Option Additions  
Description  
No.  
1
2
P301  
Digital Program Controller (single-  
loop model)  
0D  
Relay outputs (on-off, or time-  
proportional)  
2G  
5G  
Position-proportional output  
Current output  
(controller/programmer selectable)  
(changeable to 6D output)  
6D  
Voltage output (current value  
adjustment function supported, on-  
off, or time-proportional)  
(changeable to 5D output)  
3D  
5K  
Heat-cool output, relay output +  
relay output (PID control or 3-  
position-proportional)  
Heat-cool output, current output +  
current output (changeable be-  
tween current output and voltage  
output)  
0
One input channel  
ES  
Free power supply (90 to 264Vac)  
No auxiliary output  
00  
01  
02  
1 auxiliary output  
2 auxiliary outputs  
0
1
2
External switch inputs (4), time  
events not supported, communica-  
tions not supported  
External switch inputs (12), 5 time  
events supported, communications  
not supported  
External switch inputs (12), 5 time  
events supported, RS-485 commu-  
nications supported  
00  
T0  
K0  
D0  
B0  
Additional treatment not supported  
Tropical treatment  
Antisulfide treatment  
Inspection Certificate supplied  
Additional treatment + Inspection  
Certificate provided  
L0  
Y0  
Antisulfide treatment + Inspection  
Certificate provided  
Traceability Certificate  
Handling Precautions  
On 2G, 3D and 5K output models, 2 auxiliary output (option 1) cannot be desig-  
nated.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
2-1 Structure  
This controller comprises a body, console, case, standard terminal base and add-on terminal base.  
Console  
Contains 7-segment display, LEDs,  
operation keys and loader connector.  
Case  
Body  
Contains console and electrical circuits.  
Standard terminal base  
Connectors for connecting power, input, output, event outputs,  
external switch inputs (4) and auxiliary outputs (options)  
Add-on terminal base  
Terminal for connecting external switch inputs (8 options), time event outputs (options) and  
CPL communications (options).  
The add-on terminal base is provided only on models that support optional external switch  
inputs (8) and time event outputs.  
Lock screw  
Fixes the case to the body.  
Key cover  
Cover for preventing erroneous operation.  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
2-2 Console  
The console comprises keys for operating the controller, displays and LEDs.  
Basic display state  
The “basic display state” is the state in which the controller operating state is displayed  
on the console.  
When the power is turned ON, the controller is in this state.  
Key operation changes the controller from the basic display state to one of the parameter  
setup, program setup, program copy or general reset states. Key operation also returns  
the controller to the basic display state.  
Power ON  
Parameter setups  
Program setups  
Basic display states  
Program copy  
General reset  
Display  
Segment No. display  
Program No. display  
Basic indicator LED lamps  
Upper display  
Lower display  
Mode indicator LED lamps  
Low battery voltage LED (BAT)  
Control/output state LED  
Event LEDs  
Profile display  
• Program No. display  
In the basic display state, this display indicates the currently selected program No.  
In the program setup state, this display indicates the program No. currently being set up.  
During constant-value operation, this display goes out in the basic display state.  
When an alarm occurs in the basic display state, alarm code “A L” is displayed.  
• Segment No. display  
In the basic display state, this display indicates the currently selected segment No.  
In the program setup state, this display indicates the segment No. currently being set up.  
During constant-value operation, this display goes out in the basic display state.  
In the parameter setup state, this display indicates the item No.  
When an alarm occurs in the basic display state, the alarm code No. is displayed.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
Mode indicator LEDs  
RUN, HLD: Display the READY, RUN, HOLD, FAST and END modes. (See follow-  
ing table.)  
Mode  
READY  
RUN  
HOLD  
FAST  
END  
LED  
RUN  
Out  
Out  
Lit  
Out  
Lit  
Blinking  
Out  
Out  
HLD  
Out  
Blinking  
MAN  
PRG  
: Lights in the MANUAL mode, and goes out in the AUTO mode.  
: Lights in the program setup state. Otherwise, this LED is out.  
Upper display  
In the basic display state, displays PV and other values.  
In the parameter setup state, displays the item code.  
Lower display  
In the basic display state, displays SP, time, output and other values.  
In the parameter setup state, displays the item setting value.  
Low battery voltage LED  
BAT: Blinks when the battery voltage is low. Otherwise, this LED is out.  
Control/output state LED  
AT: Blinks during auto-tuning, and lights during smart-tuning. Otherwise, this LED is  
out.  
OT1: When relay or voltage are assigned to output 1, lights when output is ON and goes  
out when output is OFF. In the case of 2G output models, lights when the open-  
side relay is ON and goes out when the relay is OFF.  
Lights when current output is assigned to output 1.  
OT2: When relay or voltage are assigned to output 2, lights when output is ON and goes  
out when output is OFF. In the case of 2G output models, lights when the closed-  
side relay is ON and goes out when the relay is OFF. Lights when current output  
is assigned to output 2, and goes out when auxiliary output is assigned to output 2.  
OT3: Out  
Basic indicator LEDs  
PV: Lights during PV display. Otherwise, this LED is out.  
SP: Lights during SP display. Otherwise, this LED is out.  
OUT: Lights during output display. Otherwise, this LED is out.  
TM: Lights during time display. Otherwise, this LED is out.  
CYC: Lights during cycle display. Otherwise, this LED is out.  
CH1: Out  
CH2: Out  
Event LEDs  
EV1, EV2, : In the basic display state or parameter setup state, light when each of  
EV3  
events1 to 3 are ON, and go out when OFF.  
In the program setup (programming) state, light when each of the items  
for events 1 to 3 are displayed. Otherwise, these LEDs are out.  
T1, T2, T3, : Light when each of time events 1 to 5 are ON, and go out when OFF.  
T4, T5  
In the program setup (programming) state, light when each of the items  
for time events 1 to 5 are displayed.  
Otherwise, these LEDs are out.  
Profile display  
Displays the tendencies (rise, soak, fall) of the program pattern.  
Blinks during G.soak standby, and lights successively after the power is turned ON.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
Keys  
DISP  
PROG : Program key  
: Display key  
FUNC : Function key  
Loader jack  
: Left arrow key, right arrow key  
: Up arrow key, down arrow key  
A/M  
: Auto/Manual key  
AT  
RUN/HOLD : Run/Hold key  
: Clear key  
: Auto-tuning key  
CLR  
PARA : Parameter key  
ENT  
: Enter key  
Category  
Function  
To change the display  
Key operation  
DISP  
Basic display state  
PROG  
To change the program No. in ascending order  
(in READY mode)  
To execute running of program  
(in READY mode)  
RUN/HOLD  
To run the program  
(in READY, HOLD, FAST modes)  
To hold the program  
(in RUN mode)  
PROG  
RUN/HOLD  
DISP  
To reset the program  
(in READY, HOLD, FAST, END modes)  
+
PROG  
FUNC  
A/M  
To advance the program  
(in RUN, HOLD, FAST modes)  
+
+
To run the program fast  
(in RUN, HOLD modes)  
To execute manual operation  
(in AUTO mode)  
To execute automatic operation  
(in MANUAL mode)  
AT  
To start auto-tuning  
(when not executing auto-tuning)  
To cancel auto-tuning  
(when executing auto-tuning)  
To change values during manual operation  
(when MV or SP is blinking)  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
Category  
Function  
Key operation  
FUNC  
PARA  
Starts parameter setup. So the controller enters se-  
lection of setup group (major item).  
(in basic display state)  
Parameter setup  
+
PARA  
ENT  
To change the setup group (major item)  
To fix the setup group  
To moves between individual items (minor items)  
ENT  
To start changing individual item setting values  
(while setting value is blinking)  
To end changing individual item setting values  
(while setting value is blinking)  
To change individual item setting values  
(while setting value is blinking)  
PARA  
To cancel changing individual item setting values  
(in basic display state)  
To selects setup group  
To end parameter setup  
DISP  
PARA  
PARA  
key  
To start changing assignment item setting values  
(in basic display state)  
Assignment item  
setup  
To move to next item by assignment item, and start  
changing setting values  
To change assignment item setting values  
(while setting value is blinking)  
ENT  
To end changing assignment item setting values  
(while setting value is blinking)  
To start changing assignment item setting values  
To end assignment item setup  
DISP  
FUNC  
PROG  
Program setup  
To start program setup (programming)  
(in basic display state)  
+
To move between program items and segment Nos.  
ENT  
To start changing item setting values  
(while setting value is blinking)  
To end changing item setting values  
(while setting value is blinking)  
To change item setting values  
(while setting value is blinking)  
FUNC  
DISP  
CLR  
To clear item setting  
(while setting value is blinking)  
+
To cancel changing item setting values  
(while setting value is blinking)  
FUNC  
FUNC  
FUNC  
ENT  
To insert/delete segments  
+
+
+
PROG  
To change the program No. in ascending order  
To change the program No. in descending order  
To end program setup (programming)  
DISP  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
Category  
Function  
To start program copy  
Key operation  
PROG  
Program copy  
+
(in basic display state)  
To change the copy destination program No.  
ENT  
To execute program copy  
(while setting value is blinking)  
DISP  
To end program copy  
CLR  
FUNC  
DISP  
General reset  
To check general reset  
(in basic display state)  
+
+
ENT  
To execute general reset  
To cancel general reset  
DISP  
Handling Precautions  
Do not operate the console keys using a sharp-pointed object such as a propel-  
ling pencil or needle. Doing so might damage the console.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
Functions using two or more keys  
PROG  
RUN/HOLD  
+
: Reset keys  
Press  
RUN/HOLD  
PROG  
with  
held down in the basic display state to reset the controller.  
The controller enters the READY mode in the RUN, HOLD, FAST or END modes.  
The controller cannot be reset in the READY mode by key operation.  
PROG  
DISP  
+
: Advance keys  
DISP  
PROG  
Press  
with  
held down in the program operation mode in the basic display state to  
advance the program.  
In the RUN, HOLD or FAST modes, the program advances to the next segment.  
The controller cannot advance in the READY mode by key operation.  
FUNC  
+
: Fast keys  
FUNC  
Press  
with  
held down in the program operation mode in the basic display state to  
fast-operate the program.  
The controller enters the FAST mode from the RUN or HOLD modes.  
FUNC  
FUNC  
PARA  
+
+
: Parameter setup keys  
FUNC  
PARA  
Press  
with  
held down in the basic display state to move to selection of the setting  
group (major items) in the parameter setup state.  
PROG  
: Program setup (programming) keys  
PROG  
FUNC  
Press  
with  
held down in the program operation mode in the basic display state to  
move to the program setup (programming) state.  
PROG  
FUNC  
Press  
with  
held down in the program setup state to change the No. of the program  
to be set up in ascending order.  
FUNC  
FUNC  
FUNC  
+
+
+
: Program No. change keys  
FUNC  
Press  
with  
held down in the program setup state to change the No. of the program to  
be set up in descending order.  
CLR  
ENT  
: Program item delete keys  
CLR  
FUNC  
Press  
setting.  
with  
held down during entry of settings in the program setup state to clear the  
: Segment insert/delete keys  
ENT  
FUNC  
Press  
with  
held down at SP or time item in the program setup state to move to the  
segment insert/delete screen.  
PROG  
+
: Program copy keys  
PROG  
Press  
with  
held down in the program operation READY mode in the basic display  
state to move to the program copy screen.  
FUNC  
CLR  
DISP  
+
+
: General reset keys  
CLR  
DISP  
FUNC  
Press  
and  
with  
held down in the READY AUTO mode in the basic display  
state to move to the general reset confirmation screen.  
Loader jack  
This jack is for connecting the loader. Objects other than the loader plug should not be  
inserted into this jack.  
The loader jack is not isolated from internal digital circuits.  
Be sure to cap the loader jack when it is not in use.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
2-3 Input Type and Range No.  
Inputs  
Thermocouple  
Input Format Range No. Code  
Temp. Range (°C)  
Temp. Range (°F)  
K (CA)  
0
1
K09  
K08  
K04  
K29  
K44  
K46  
E08  
J08  
0 to 1200  
0.0 to 800.0  
0.0 to 400.0  
-200 to 1200  
-200.0 to 300.0  
-200.0 to 200.0  
0.0 to 800.0  
0.0 to 800.0  
-200.0 to 300.0  
0 to 1800  
0 to 2400  
0 to 1600  
0 to 750  
K (CA)  
K (CA)  
2
K (CA)  
3
-300 to 2400  
-300 to 700  
-300 to 400  
0 to 1800  
0 to 1600  
-300 to 700  
0 to 3300  
0 to 3100  
0 to 3100  
o to 4200  
0 to 2552  
0 to 3400  
32 to 2372  
32 to 2372  
32 to 2372  
-300 to +750  
-300 to +1600  
K (CA)  
4
K (CA)  
5
E (CRC)  
J (IC)  
6
7
T (CC)  
8
T44  
B18  
R16  
S16  
W23  
W14  
D19  
Z13  
U13  
Y13  
Z08  
Z07  
Z06  
B (PR30-6)  
R (PR13)  
S (PR10)  
W (WRe5-26)  
W (WRe5-26)  
PR40-20  
Ni-Ni-Mo  
N
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
0 to 1600  
0 to 1600  
0 to 2300  
0 to 1400  
0 to 1900  
0 to 1300  
0 to 1300  
PL II  
0 to 1300  
DIN U  
-200.0 to +400.0  
-200.0 to +800.0  
0.0 to +300.0K  
DIN L  
Golden iron  
chromel  
Resistance temperature detector (RTD)  
Input Format Range No. Code  
Temp. Range (°C)  
Temp. Range (°F)  
JIS’89 Pt100  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
F50  
F46  
F32  
F36  
F38  
F33  
F05  
F03  
F01  
P50  
P46  
P32  
P36  
P38  
P33  
P05  
P03  
P01  
-200.0 to 500.0  
-200.0 to 200.0  
-100.0 to 150.0  
-50.0 to 200.0  
-60.0 to 40.0  
-40.0 to 60.0  
0.0 to 500.0  
-300 to 900  
-300 to 400  
(IEC Pt100)  
-150.0 to 300.0  
-50.0 to 400.0  
-76.0 to 104.0  
-40.0 to 140.0  
0.0 to 900.0  
0.0 to 500.0  
0.0 to 200.0  
-300 to 900  
0.0 to 300.0  
0.00 to 100.00  
-200.0 to 500.0  
-200.0 to 200.0  
-100.0 to 150.0  
-50.0 to 200.0  
-60.0 to 40.0  
-40.0 to 60.0  
0.0 to 500.0  
JIS’89 J Pt100  
-300 to 400  
-150.0 to 300.0  
-50.0 to 400.0  
-76.0 to 104.0  
-40.0 to 140.0  
0.0 to 900.0  
0.0 to 500.0  
0.0 to 200.0  
0.0 to 300.0  
0.00 to 100.00  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
dc current, dc voltage  
Input Format Range No. Code Range (programmable)  
4 to 20mA  
0 to 20mA  
0 to 10mA  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
C01  
C08  
M01  
L02  
L01  
L04  
L08  
V01  
L05  
L07  
-10 to +10mV  
0 to 100mV  
0 to 1V  
-1999 to 9999  
-1 to +1V  
1 to 5V  
0 to 5V  
0 to 10V  
Handling Precautions  
• The unit of code Z06 is Kelvin (K)  
• The lower limit readout of code B18 is 20°C (68°F).  
The lower limit readout (°C) of codes K44, K46, T44, Z08 and Z07 is -199.9°C.  
• The lower limit readout (°C) of codes F50, F46, P50 and P46 is -199.9°C.  
• The upper limit readout (°C) of codes F01 and P01.  
• The PV lower limit alarm does not occur with code F50.  
However, note that the PV lower limit alarm occurs at a disconnection when  
input has been downscaled when input is disconnected during setup.  
• The number of digits past the decimal point for dc current and dc voltage is  
programmable within the range 0 to 3.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. MOUNTING  
3-1 External Dimensions  
Unit: mm  
(18)  
15  
159.5  
137  
96  
A
B
A
B
Mounting bracket 81405411-001  
Soft dust-proof cover set (sold separately)  
81446087-001  
Hard dust-proof cover set (sold separately)  
81446083-001  
Terminal cover set (sold separately) 81446084-001  
A-A  
B-B  
Terminal screw  
37  
78.4  
Back plate  
Add-on terminal base  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. MOUNTING  
3-2 Panel Cutout Dimensions  
Use a steel panel of at least 2mm in thickness for mounting the controller.  
Unit: mm  
Panel cutout dimensions  
Panel cutout dimensions during multiple mounted  
(recommended)  
+0.8  
92  
0
46  
96 x (N - 1)  
96 x N - 4  
46  
N=number of units installed  
Panel cutout dimensions when mounting units horizontally and vertically (recommended)  
99 min. (when horizontally mounted)  
(107 min. when hard dust-prevention  
cover is used)  
Handling Precautions  
When mounting the controller, take care to prevent the temperature at the lower  
surface of the controller’s case from exceeding the operating temperature range  
(0 to 50°C), particularly when mounting vertically or during multiple mounting.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. MOUNTING  
3-3 Mounting  
WARNING  
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power  
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.  
Do not disassemble the DCP301. Doing so might cause electric shock or  
faulty operation.  
CAUTION  
Use the DCP301 within the operating ranges recommended in the specifi-  
cations (temperature, humidity, voltage, vibration, shock, mounting direc-  
tion, atmosphere, etc.). Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation.  
Do not block ventilation holes. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.  
Do not allow lead clippings, chips or water to enter the controller case.  
Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.  
Mounting locations  
Avoid installing the DCP301 in the following locations:  
• Locations outside of the operating temperature range (0 to 50°C) and operating humid-  
ity range (10 to 90%RH)  
• Locations subject to sulfide gas or other flammable gases  
• Locations subject to dust or oil smoke  
• Locations subject to the direction sunlight, wind or rain  
• Locations that directly subject the body to vibration or impact  
• Locations under high-voltage lines, near welders or near sources of electrical noise  
• Locations near (within 15m) of high-voltage ignition equipment such as boilers  
• Locations where magnetic fields are generated  
• Locations subject to flammable liquids or moisture  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. MOUNTING  
Noise generating sources and countermeasures  
Generally, the following generate electrical noise:  
(1) Relays and contacts  
(2) Solenoid coils, solenoid valves  
(3) Power lines (in particular, 90Vac min.)  
(4) Induction loads  
(5) Inverters  
(6) Motor commutators  
(7) Phase angle control SCR  
(8) Wireless communications equipment  
(9) Welding equipment  
(10) High-voltage ignition equipment  
If the influence of electrical noise cannot be eliminated, we recommend taking the  
following countermeasures:  
- Provision of a CR filters for fast-rising noise  
Recommended CR filter: Model No. 81446365-001  
- Provision of a varister for noise with a high wave height  
Recommended varister: Model No. 81446366-001 (100V)  
81446367-001 (200V)  
Handling Precautions  
The varister may become short-circuited when trouble occurs. Pay attention to  
this when providing a varister on a controller.  
Dust-proof cover  
Use the dust-proof cover when using the controller in a dusty or dirty location, and to  
prevent inadvertent operation.  
Two dust proof-covers are provided, hard or soft, each with the following differing func-  
tions.  
Type  
Hard  
Soft  
Confirmation on Display Operation  
x
indicates that a function can be used.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. MOUNTING  
Mounting method  
Panel  
Mounting bracket 81405411-001  
Mounting bracket  
Firmly secure the top and bottom of the controller by the mounting brackets.  
When mounting the controller, secure by lower mounting bracket (1) first.  
(2)  
Mounting bracket  
Panel  
Panel  
(1)  
Handling Precautions  
To secure the controller, tighten the screw on the mounting bracket (supplied)  
until there is no more play and then tighten a further full turn. Take care not to  
overtighten the screw. Doing so might deform the case.  
Keep the mounting angle to within 10° from the horizontal at both the controller rear  
top and bottom.  
Lift up from rear by  
10° max.  
Pull down from rear by  
10° max.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-1 Wiring Precautions  
WARNING  
Before connecting the DCP301 to the measurement target or external con-  
trol circuits, make sure that the FG terminal is properly grounded (100  
max.).  
Failure to do so might cause electric shock or fire.  
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power  
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.  
Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power terminals. Doing  
so might cause electric shock.  
CAUTION  
Wire the DCP301 properly according to predetermined standards. Also  
wire the DCP301 using designed power leads according to recognized  
installation methods.  
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.  
Do not allow lead clippings, chips or water to enter the DCP301 case. Do-  
ing so might cause fire or faulty operation.  
Inputs to the current input terminals (31) and (33) on the DCP301 should  
be within the current and voltage ranges listed in the specifications.  
Failure to do so might cause electric shock or faulty operation.  
Firmly tighten the terminal screws at the torque listed in the specifications.  
Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause electric shock or fire.  
Do not use unused terminals on the DCP301 as relay terminals.  
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.  
We recommend attaching the terminal cover (sold separately) after wiring  
the DCP301. Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty op-  
eration.  
Use the relays on the DCP301 within the service life listed in the specifica-  
tions.  
Continued use of the relays after the recommended service life might cause  
fire or faulty operation.  
Use induced lighting surge preventive device if there is the risk of power  
surges caused by lightning.  
Failure to do might cause fire or faulty operation.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Precautions  
• Before wiring the DCP301, check the controller catalog No. and terminal Nos.  
on the label on the rear of the body. After wiring the DCP301, be sure to check  
the wiring for any mistakes.  
• Maintain a distance of at least 50cm between I/O leads or communications  
leads and the power lead. Also, do not pass these leads through the same  
piping or wiring duct.  
• When wiring with crimped terminals, take care to prevent contact with adjacent  
terminals.  
• When connecting the DCP301’s thermocouples in parallel to other controllers,  
make sure that the total input impedance of the other controller is at least  
1M.  
If the input impedance is less than 1M, the DCP301 may not be able to detect  
sensor disconnection.  
• When inputting the DCP301’s I/O (parallel connection in case of input) to an A/  
D converter or analog scanner, read data may fluctuate.  
To prevent this, adopt one of the following measures.  
(1) Use a low-speed, integrating type A/D converter.  
(2) Insert an isolator without a switching power supply between the DCP301  
and A/D converter.  
(3) Average data on a personal computer when reading data.  
(4) If possible, set a filter for the input.  
• Provide the wiring for the instrument power supply with a mains power shutoff  
switch within reach of the instrument operator.  
• Provide the wiring for the instrument power supply with a delayed operation  
type (T) 1A current rating, 250V voltage rating fuse. (IEC 127)  
• Devices and systems to be connected to this unit must have the basic insula-  
tion sufficient to withstand the maximum operating voltage levels of the power  
supply and input/output parts.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-2 Compensating Lead  
In the case of thermocouple input, connect the bare thermocouple lead to the terminal. If the thermocouple is located  
a long way from the DCP301 or the thermocouple is connected to a terminal, extend the connection using a compen-  
sating lead and then connect to the terminal. Use shielded compensating leads only.  
• For I/O other than thermocouples, use JCS-364 shielded instrument polyethylene insu-  
lated vinyl sheath cable or equivalent product. (This is generally referred to “twisted  
shielded cable for instruments.”) The following cables are recommended.  
Fujikura Ltd.  
2-core IPEV-S-0.9mm2 x 1P  
3-core ITEV-S-0.9mm2 x 1T  
Hitachi Cable Co. 2-core KPEV 0.9mm2 x 1P  
3-core KTEV-S-0.9mm2 x 1T  
• Shielded, multi-core microphone cord (MVVS) can be used if there is little electro-  
magnetic induction.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-3 Terminal Connections  
Use crimped terminals that fit onto M3.5 screws.  
Unit: mm  
3.7dia.  
Handling Precautions  
When installing the DCP301 in locations subject to vibration or impact, be sure  
to use round crimped terminals to prevent the lead from coming loose from the  
terminal.  
When wiring with crimped terminals, take care to prevent contact with adjacent  
terminals.  
The recommended tightening torque for the terminal screws is 0.78 to  
0.98Nm.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-4 Layout of Terminals and Recommended Lead Draw-out  
Direction  
Wiring is carried out on the standard terminal base or add-on terminal base. The following diagram shows the recom-  
mended draw-out directions for the leads on the standard terminal base.  
The lead draw-out directions are the same when using the add-on terminal base.  
(11) to (20) to left (  
)
(21) to (26) to left (  
)
(26) to (34) to right (  
)
(1) to (10) to left (  
)
Lead draw-out direction  
Lead draw-out direction  
Standard terminal base  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-5 Connecting the Ground and Power Supply  
Power supply  
Connect the DCP301 to a single-phase power supply for controllers, and take measures  
to prevent the influence of electrical noise.  
200/200V,  
100/100V  
Recommended  
line filter  
insulated transformer  
DCP301  
81446364-001  
Instrument  
power supply  
1
E
2
3
GND  
4
1
2
3
~
GND  
GND  
Other circuits  
Handling Precautions  
If the power supply generates a lot of electrical noise, we recommend inserting  
an insulating transformer in the power circuit and using a line filter.  
Recommended line filter: Model No. 81446364-001  
After providing anti-noise measures, do not bundle primary and secondary power  
leads together, or pass them through the same piping or wiring duct.  
Ground  
When it is difficult to ground shielded cable, prepare a separate ground terminal (earth  
bar).  
Ground type: 100max.  
Ground cable: 2mm sq. min soft-copper wire (AWG14)  
Cable length: Max. 20m  
DCP301  
FG  
3
terminal  
GND terminal plate  
GND (100max.)  
Shielded cable  
Handling Precautions  
Use only the FG terminal (3) on the DCP301 for grounding. Do not ground across  
other terminals.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-6 Wiring of Standard and Add-on Terminal Base  
Standard terminal layout  
5G output  
6D output  
OD output 5K output  
Instrument  
power supply  
External switch input (RSW)  
2G output 3D output Auxiliary output  
90 to 264Vac  
1
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
RSW1  
RSW2  
RSW3  
RSW4  
2
3
50/60Hz  
FG (Frame GND)  
1
4 to 20mA  
voltage  
3
Relay  
Relay  
Output 1  
Output 2  
Y
T
4
EV1  
COM  
5
Auxiliary  
output 1  
4 to 20mA  
voltage  
G
6
Current  
input  
mAdc  
EV2  
EV3  
Event outputs  
7
Input  
Auxiliary  
output 2  
Resistance  
temperature  
detector  
8
4 to 20mA  
V, mV  
9
Voltage input  
*
10  
Thermocouple  
input  
Auxiliary output  
4 to 20mA  
Recorder, etc.  
* On 2G, 3D or 5K models, (17) and (18) are the auxiliary outputs.  
On 0D, 5G or 6D models, (14) and (15), and (17) and (18) are the auxiliary outputs.  
Add-on terminal layout  
External switch  
inputs  
Time event outputs  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
SDA  
SDB  
RDA  
RDB  
SG  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
Load  
Load  
Load  
Load  
Load  
RSW5  
RSW6  
RSW7  
RSW8  
RSW9  
RSW10  
RSW11  
RSW12  
RS-485  
communications  
62  
63  
64  
Bias circuit  
External  
10 to 29Vdc power supply  
25  
To terminals  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-7 Connecting Inputs (analog inputs)  
Connecting input 1  
Multiple input 1 supports various sensor inputs. Connect as follows according to the  
sensor being used.  
Thermocouple input  
RTD input  
31  
32  
33  
34  
31  
32  
33  
34  
C
B
A
dc voltage input  
dc current input  
31  
32  
33  
34  
31  
32  
33  
34  
mA  
V, mV  
Handling Precautions  
Applying voltage across dc current input terminals (31) and (33) may cause  
faulty operation.  
Take care of polarities (+,-) when wiring inputs.  
Use only shielded cable for wiring inputs.  
When using a thermocouple input, prevent air blasts from coming into contact  
with the terminal. Doing so might cause a reading error.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-8 Connecting control outputs (outputs 1, 2)  
WARNING  
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power  
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.  
Relay output (0D)  
Connect as follows.  
11  
12  
13  
Contact rating, resistive load  
5A (30Vdc/120Vac)  
4A (240Vac)  
Load  
Power supply  
Minimum switching current: 100mA  
Handling Precautions  
When switching small currents, connect a bleeder resistor to allow current flow of  
the minimum relay switching input (100mA min.).  
Current output (5G)  
Connect as follows.  
11  
12  
13  
Actuator  
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc  
Resistive load 600max.  
Handling Precautions  
4 to 20mAdc and 0 to 20mAdc can be selected in setup data C 9 0.  
Position-proportional output (2G)  
Connect as follows paying attention to the switching direction.  
2
11  
Open side  
Contact rating  
4A (120Vac, cosø=0.4)  
2A (240Vac, cosø=0.4)  
Load  
Load  
3
12  
13  
Power supply  
1
Closed side  
Y
Open  
T
14  
15  
16  
Feedback resistance  
100 to 2500Ω  
G
Closed  
Handling Precautions  
The life of internal relays is limited.  
Avoid setting the PID constant in such a way that results in excessive repeated  
ON/OFF switching.  
When using a 100/200Vac motor, pay attention to rush current and the contact  
rating. If necessary, provide an external auxiliary relay.  
Separate the wiring for motor terminals (11) (12) (13) and feedback resistor  
terminals (14) (15) (16).  
(Do not wire the leads in the same duct or use 6-core cable. Doing so might  
result in faulty controller operation caused by electrical noise when the motor is  
started up.)  
When controlling without motor feedback with variable parameter M .-Cset to  
2, terminals (14) (15) (16) need not be connected.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
Voltage output (6D)  
Connect as follows.  
11  
SSR  
2 to 22mAdc  
12  
13  
With current adjustment function  
(setup: C78)  
Handling Precautions  
Voltage output is reliant on an internal fixed-current circuit.  
Set the current value in the setup data so that the optimum voltage is obtained  
matched to the conditions of the SSR in use and load.  
Factory setting: general-purpose SSR voltage value.  
Heat/cool output (3D)  
Connect as follows.  
11  
Output 1  
Load  
Contact rating, resistive load  
5A (30Vdc/120Vac)  
4A (240Vac)  
12  
Power supply  
13  
Minimum switching current: 100mA  
14  
Output 2  
Load  
Contact rating, resistive load  
5A (30Vdc/120Vac)  
4A (240Vac)  
15  
Power supply  
16  
Minimum switching current: 100mA  
Handling Precautions  
When switching small currents, connect a bleeder resistor to allow current flow of  
the minimum relay switching input (100mA min.).  
Heat/cool output (5K)  
Connect as follows.  
Output 1  
11  
Current output:  
Load (SSR)  
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc  
Load resistance 600max.  
Voltage output:  
12  
13  
2 to 22mAdc  
With current adjustment function (setup: C78)  
Output 2  
14  
15  
16  
Current output:  
Load (SSR)  
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc  
Load resistance 600max.  
Voltage output:  
2 to 22mAdc  
With current adjustment function (setup: C79)  
Handling Precautions  
Current output and voltage output can be selected by setups C 7 5 and C 7 6.  
Voltage output is reliant on an internal fixed-current circuit.  
Set the current value in the setup data so that the optimum voltage is obtained  
matched to the conditions of the SSR in use and load.  
Factory setting: general-purpose SSR voltage value.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-9 Connecting auxiliary outputs (outputs 2, 3)  
Optional auxiliary outputs can be added on.  
WARNING  
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power  
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.  
0D, 5G, 6D auxiliary outputs  
14  
15  
16  
Auxiliary output 1  
(output 2)  
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc  
Resistive load 600max.  
Receiver  
17  
18  
19  
Auxiliary output 2  
(output 3)  
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc  
Resistive load 600max.  
Receiver  
Handling Precautions  
4 to 20mAdc and 0 to 20mAdc can be selected in setup data C 9 0.  
Use shielded cable only.  
2G, 3D, 5K auxiliary outputs  
17  
18  
19  
Auxiliary output 2  
(output 3)  
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc  
Resistive load 600max.  
Receiver  
Auxiliary output 1 is not provided for 2G, 3D and 5K outputs.  
Handling Precautions  
4 to 20mAdc and 0 to 20mAdc can be selected in setup data C 9 0.  
Use shielded cable only.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-10 Connecting Event Output (relay output)  
Event outputs EV1 and EV2 are 1a contact, and event output EV3 is 1a1b. Event outputs are connected on the  
standard terminal base.  
Standard terminal base  
4
Contact rating, resistive load  
1A (30/250Vdc)  
EV1 1a  
EV2 1a  
EV3 1a1b  
Load  
Power supply  
Load  
Power supply  
5
6
Contact rating, resistive load  
1A (30/250Vdc)  
7
8
Contact rating, resistive load  
2A (30/250Vdc)  
Load  
Power supply  
9
Minimum switching current: 10mA  
10  
Handling Precautions  
When switching small currents, connect a bleeder resistor to allow current flow of  
the minimum relay switching input (10mA min.).  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-11 Connecting Time Event Output (open-collector)  
Optional time event outputs T1 to T5 (open-collector outputs) can be added on. Time event outputs are connected on  
the add-on terminal base.  
Add-on terminal base  
T1  
Load  
49  
Maximum load current:  
OFF leakage current:  
70mA/load  
0.1mA max.  
T2  
Load  
50  
51  
52  
53  
55  
56  
T3  
Load  
T4  
Load  
T5  
Load  
Bias circuit  
External power supply  
10 to 29Vdc  
Handling Precautions  
Be sure to connect terminal (55) to the + terminal of the external power supply.  
Otherwise, open-collector output will not function.  
Do not short-circuit the + terminal of the external power supply and terminals  
(49) to (53) on the DCP301. Doing so will cause faulty open-collector output.  
(The DCP301 does not contain a short-circuit prevention circuit.)  
When connecting to a semiconductor load such as a programmable controller  
(sequencer), select a module whose current directions are matching.  
Use a module that does not operate by leakage current when the open-collec-  
tor output of the DCP301 is OFF.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-12 Connecting External Switch (RSW) Input  
The DCP301 is provided with four external switch inputs as standard (eight optional). The optional eight inputs are  
located on the add-on terminal base. Wire the external switch inputs across the standard and add-on terminal bases.  
Standard terminal base  
RSW1  
21  
Contact  
RSW2  
22  
Add-on terminal base  
Contact  
RSW3  
RSW5  
RSW6  
RSW7  
RSW8  
RSW9  
RSW10  
RSW11  
RSW12  
23  
24  
25  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
Contact  
RSW4  
Contact  
Contact  
Contact  
Contact  
Contact  
Contact  
Contact  
Contact  
Contact  
COM  
Handling Precautions  
The external switch inputs on the DCP301 have built-in power supplies (open  
voltage 12Vdc). Be sure to use no-voltage contacts for external contacts.  
Use no-voltage contacts such as gold contacts whose small current can be  
switched ON/OFF. On some relay contacts, the small current cannot be switched  
ON/OFF. Use no-voltage contacts having a sufficient minimum switching ca-  
pability with respect to the contact current and open voltage of the DCP301.  
When using a semiconductor (e.g. open-collector) as a no-voltage contact, use  
a semiconductor whose contact terminal voltages at contact ON are 3V max.,  
and whose leakage current at contact OFF is 0.1mA.  
External switch inputs on the DCP301/302 can be connected in parallel.  
When connecting in parallel with other controllers, thoroughly check the condi-  
tions of the other controller before configuring the control system.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
Internal circuit for controller components for connecting external switch inputs  
Standard terminal base  
12Vdc  
Add-on terminal base  
12Vdc  
21  
41  
48  
12Vdc  
12Vdc  
External  
switch  
input  
External  
switch  
input  
24  
25  
Internal circuit  
Internal circuit  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-13 Connecting for Communications  
Some controller models support the RS-485 communications interface. Select the RS-485 communications models  
by selected the required catalog No.  
Connect as follows.  
Handling Precautions  
The DCP301 operates as a slave station.  
RS-485 interface  
Add-on terminal base  
SDA  
57  
SDB  
58  
RDA  
59  
RDB  
60  
SG  
61  
Handling Precautions  
Multi-drop connection of slave stations is possible.  
Make sure that different addresses are set for each slave station.  
Provide terminating resistor (total of 4 in the case of a 5-wire system connec-  
tion) on both ends of the communications path. Use terminating resistor of  
150±5%, 1/2W min.  
In the case of a 3-wire system connection, short-circuit terminals (57) and (59),  
(58) and (60) on the DCP301.  
Do not short-circuit the RDA and RDB, or SDA and SDB terminals. Doing so  
might damage the DCP301.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
5-wire system RS-485 mutual connection  
Terminating resistor  
Slave station DCP301  
SDA  
57  
Terminating resistor  
SDB  
58  
RDA  
59  
RDB  
60  
SG  
61  
FG  
Shielded cable  
Master station  
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
SG  
FG  
Slave station DCP301  
Shielded cable  
SDA  
57  
SDB  
58  
RDA  
59  
Handling Precautions  
RDB  
60  
Be sure to connect SG terminals each  
others.  
Failure to do so might cause unstable  
communications.  
SG  
61  
FG  
Slave station DCP301  
Shielded cable  
SDA  
57  
SDB  
58  
RDA  
59  
Terminating resistor  
RDB  
60  
SG  
61  
Terminating resistor  
FG  
Provide terminating resistor of 150±5%, 1/2W min. at both ends of the communications path.  
Grounding of the shielded FG terminal should be carried out at only one end and not both ends.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
3-wire system RS-485 mutual connection  
Terminating resistor  
Slave station DCP301  
SDA  
57  
SDB  
RDA  
RDB  
SG  
58  
59  
60  
61  
FG  
Master station  
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
SG  
Shielded cable  
*
*
FG  
Slave station DCP301  
Shielded cable  
SDA  
SDB  
RDA  
RDB  
SG  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
Handling Precautions  
Be sure to connect SG terminals each  
others.  
Failure to do so might cause unstable  
communications.  
FG  
Shielded cable  
Slave station DCP301  
SDA  
57  
SDB  
RDA  
RDB  
SG  
58  
59  
60  
61  
Terminating resistor  
FG  
Provide terminating resistor of 150±5%, 1/2W min. at both ends of the communications path.  
Grounding of the shielded FG terminal should be carried out at only one end and not both ends.  
When there are only three RS-485 terminals, terminals marked * are wired internally.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. WIRING  
4-14 Isolating Inputs and Outputs  
The following figures show isolation between inputs and outputs. Solid lines show isolated items, and dotted lines  
show non-isolated items.  
Control outputs 0D, 5G, 6D, 3D, 5K  
31  
32  
33  
34  
11  
12  
Input 1  
(full multiple-input PV  
supported)  
Output 1  
(relay, current, voltage output)  
Output 2  
(relay, current, voltage output,  
auxiliary output)  
14  
15  
Output 3  
(auxiliary output)  
17  
18  
Loader communications  
I/O  
Loader jack  
Event output 1  
(relay output 1a)  
4
5
12 external switch inputs  
21  
6
7
Event output 2  
(relay output 1a)  
25  
41  
8
Event output 3  
(relay output 1a1b)  
9
48  
57  
10  
Communications I/O  
(RS-485)  
Time event outputs 1 to 5  
(open-collector output)  
49  
56  
61  
Handling Precautions  
The loader jack is not isolated from internal digital circuits.  
Be sure to cap the loader jack when it is not in use.  
Control output 2G  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
31  
Input 1  
(full multiple-input PV  
supported)  
Output 1  
(control output 1a relay x 2)  
32  
33  
34  
Motor feedback input  
Output 3  
(auxiliary output)  
Loader communications  
I/O  
Loader jack  
Event output 1  
(relay output 1a)  
4
5
12 external switch inputs  
21  
6
7
Event output 2  
(relay output 1a)  
25  
41  
8
Event output 3  
(relay output 1a1b)  
9
48  
57  
10  
Communications I/O  
(RS-485)  
Time event outputs 1 to 5  
(open-collector output)  
49  
56  
61  
Handling Precautions  
The loader jack is not isolated from internal digital circuits.  
Be sure to cap the loader jack when it is not in use.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
5-1 Data  
Data types  
The DCP301 supports the following data types.  
For further details, see Chapter 7, Parameter Setup and Chapter 8, Program Setup.  
Data that can be changed even in RUN mode  
Data  
Parameters  
Variable parameters  
Event configuration data  
PID parameters  
Setup data  
Data (e.g. event type)  
Control parameters of PID sets 1 to 8  
Basic data that can be changed only in  
READY mode  
Linearization table data  
Table data  
Constant-value operation Data (e.g. SP, PID) of constant-value operation  
data  
Pattern  
SP and time data  
Program  
Event  
Events 1 to 3 data  
Time event  
Time events 1 to 5 time data  
PID set No.  
G.Soak  
PV start  
Cycle  
PID set No. data for use in control  
G.Soak ON/OFF data  
PV START ON/OFF data  
Cycle count data  
Pattern link  
Pattern link destination program No. data  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
5-2 Program Patterns  
Patterns  
SP and time comprise the settings for a single segment in a pattern. Up to 30 segments  
can be linked to create a broken-line whose vertical axis is SP and horizontal axis is time.  
This system is called the “RAMP-X” system.  
SP setting: Within range of SP limitter upper and lower limits  
Timesetting: 0 to 99h, 59min or 0 to 99min, 59s  
(Select the time unit in setup data C 6 4.)  
SP is the point that corresponds to the time elapsed in the current segment on a straight  
line made by jointing the start point (SP setting value of the previous segment) to an end  
point (SP setting value of the current segment).  
Accordingly, segments are categorized as follows:  
• Rising ramp (rising ramp, rising tendency)  
Previous segment SP setting value < current segment SP setting value  
• Falling ramp (falling ramp, falling tendency)  
Previous segment SP setting value > current segment SP setting value  
• Soak (soak)  
Previous segment SP setting value = current segment SP setting value  
In the case of the No.1 segment, both the start and end points become the soak segment of  
the No.1 segment SP setting values.  
SP (other than No.1 segment) is calculated as by the following formula:  
SP = (current segment SP setting value - previous segment SP setting value) x (current  
segment elapsed time ÷ current segment time setting) + previous segment SP set-  
ting  
Time setting of current segment  
SP setting value of  
current segment  
SP setting value of  
previous segment  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
Events 1 to 3  
Events 1 to 3 are event configuration data. These are used after setting the event type,  
event standby, hysteresis and ON delay time.  
A total of three event types are available: PV type events, controller status events, and  
time events.  
PV type events  
Basic specifications  
The following page shows event type PV, deviation, absolute value deviation, SP, MV  
and MFB. In the figures, the thick lines show ON-OFF changes in state. The upper line  
expresses the ON state, and the lower line the OFF state.  
EV and H stand for event setting value and hysteresis, respectively. Output in the  
READY state is OFF.  
Event standby  
Events function as follows when event standby has been set to ON.  
- If the controller is in the  
state in the figure when changing from the READY to  
the RUN mode and after restoring the power, operation is the same as when event  
standby is set to OFF. The up-facing arrow in the figure indicates a change to ON,  
and a down-facing arrow indicates a change to OFF.  
- If the controller is outside the  
state in the figure when changing from the READY  
to the RUN mode and after restoring the power, the state is OFF. After entering the  
state, the up-facing arrow in the figure indicates a change to ON, and a down-  
facing arrow indicates a change to OFF.  
Event ON delay  
The event No. to apply the delay to and the delay time can be set regardless of event  
type. Delayfunctions to turn output ON when the event is continuously ON for the  
preset delay time after the event OFFON condition is satisfied.  
When event ON delay is combined with event standby, event standby must first be  
canceled before event ON delay functions.  
Segment progression  
- Output is OFF until the program progresses to the segment containing the event  
setting.  
- When the program progresses to the segment containing the event setting, event ON/  
OFF operation is carried out according to the event setting value.  
- The previous setting is valid until the program progresses to a segment containing a  
new event setting.  
For this reason, set as follows to disable the event set in the previous segment from a  
certain segment onwards:  
Direct action events: Upper limit value of event setting  
Reverse action events: Lower limit value of event setting  
Note, however, that some types of event turn ON even if events are set as shown  
above.  
- When the program has progressed to the No.1 segment by the cycle or pattern link  
functions, the previous setting is disabled. Output is OFF unless the No.1 segment  
contains an event setting.  
Other  
On 5G output models, when setup data C 1 8 is set to 1, and SP output (programmer  
functions) is selected, the MV direct/reverse event does not function.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
PV reverse  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
H
H
PV  
PV  
PV  
PV  
PV  
PV  
EV  
EV  
Deviation direct  
Deviation reverse  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
H
H
SP+EV  
SP+EV  
Absolute value deviation direct  
Absolute value deviation reverse  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
H
H
H
H
EV EV  
SP  
EV  
EV  
SP  
SP direct  
SP reverse  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
H
H
H
H
SP  
SP  
EV  
EV  
EV  
EV  
EV  
EV  
MV direct  
MV reverse  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
H
MV  
MV  
MFB direct  
MFB reverse  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
H
MFB  
MFB  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
Controller status events  
Controller status events are turned ON and OFF according to the controller mode, alarm  
status and other statuses.  
Though the event standby function does not function, the ON delay function does.  
Event setting values (operating point), hysteresis and event standby are not set.  
Basic operations  
The following basic operation types are provided:  
RUN+HOLD+FAST+END  
READY  
RUN  
HOLD  
FAST  
END  
G.Soak standby  
MANUAL  
Auto-tuning executing  
Constant-value operation  
MFB estimated position control, sum of all alarms  
PV range alarm  
Controller alarms  
Low battery voltage  
Console setup in progress  
Loader setup in progress  
ADV  
When the DCP301 reaches the state designated by the event type, the event is turned  
ON. Otherwise, the event is OFF.  
Alarms  
Alarms are divided into PV range alarm groups (alarm code Nos. 01 to 16) and control-  
ler alarm groups (alarm code Nos. 70 to 99, and low battery voltage).  
When the event type is set to the sum of all alarms, the alarm turns ON even if at least  
one of the alarms occurs.  
When the event type is set to PV range alarm, the alarm turns ON even if at least one of  
the alarms in the PV range alarm group occurs.  
When the event type is set to controller alarm, the alarm turns ON even if at least one  
of the alarms in the controller alarm group occurs.  
ADV  
This is ON for 1s after executing program advance. The event ON delay is disabled  
and a delay is not applied.  
Time events  
When the event 1 to 3 type is set to time event, the event can be used in the same way  
as time events 1 to 5. However, note that events 1 to 3 do not have segment No. event  
functions.  
Though the event standby function does not function, the ON delay function does.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
Time events 1 to 5  
Either of time events or segment No. events can be selected by the time event type item  
in the event configuration data setup.  
Time events  
The ON and OFF times or only the ON time can  
be set for each event No. and segment. The fol-  
lowing describes ON/OFF of output.  
Segment  
ON time  
1
<
ON OFF  
When the ON time is smaller than the OFF  
time, output is ON for the duration from the  
ON time to the OFF time.  
OFF time  
Output ON  
Output OFF  
(See segments 1, 6 and 7 in the figure.)  
When only the ON time is set, output is ON  
for the during from the ON time to the seg-  
ment end point.  
Segment  
ON time  
2
3
(See segments 2 and 5 in the figure.)  
Output turns OFF at  
end of segment even if  
OFF time is not set.  
OFF time  
Output ON  
Output OFF  
When both the ON time and OFF time are not  
set, output is OFF.  
(See segment 3 in the figure.)  
Setting only the OFF time without an ON time  
is not possible.  
(See segment 3B in the figure.)  
Segment  
ON time  
3B  
3C  
No ON  
Setting an ON time to be greater to or equal  
than the OFF time is not possible.  
(See segment 3C in the figure.)  
OFF time  
Output ON  
Output OFF  
=
>
ON OFF ON OFF  
Only ON and OFF times set within the seg-  
ment time are valid. Times straddling the next  
segment are invalid. The ON and OFF times Segment  
4
5
set in the next segment are valid.  
(See segments 4 and 5 in the figure.)  
Segment time  
ON time  
OFF time  
Accordingly, the ON and OFF times settings  
ON-OFF time is invalid  
even if set in excess of  
segment 4 time.  
at the segment end point are ignored.  
Advance to  
segment 5  
Output ON  
However, ON and OFF times set for segment  
end points when the END mode is shifted to  
Output OFF  
are valid.  
Segment  
5
6
(See segment 9 in the figure, and compare with  
segment 10 in the END mode.)  
ON time  
=
ON 0  
When the ON time is set to 0 (no OFF time  
setting, or OFF time is greater than 0), output  
becomes OFF at time 0.  
OFF time  
Output ON  
Output OFF  
ON  
continued  
If output at the previous segment end point was  
ON at this time, the output status at the seg-  
ment switching point does not momentarily  
become OFF.  
Segment  
ON time  
7
G.Soak standby  
(See segments 5 and 6 in the figure.)  
OFF time  
Output ON  
Output OFF  
The G.Soak standby time is not included in the  
ON and OFF times.  
(See segment 7 in the figure.)  
Segment time start  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
If the ON time is set to 0 in the case of G.Soak  
standby, output becomes ON from the G.Soak  
standby state, and the ON time is started at  
completion of the G.Soak standby time.  
Segment  
ON time  
8
G.Soak standby  
Segment 8 time start  
=
When 0N 0, output turns  
ON when there is input to  
segment 8.  
OFF time  
Output ON  
Output OFF  
The output time = G.Soak time + OFF time  
(See segment 8 in the figure.)  
ON and OFF time settings the same time as  
the segment end point are valid in the case of  
the final segment END mode.  
Segment  
ON time  
9
(See segment 10 in the figure.)  
=
ON segment time  
OFF time  
Output ON  
Output OFF  
Segment  
ON time  
10  
Segment time  
END mode  
=
ON segment time  
OFF time  
Output ON  
Output OFF  
Segment No. events  
The current segment No. is output as binary code.  
When all of T1 to T5 are selected as segment No. events in the time event type setup, all  
ON-OFF operations are as shown in the following table.  
When T1 to T4 are assigned in part to segment No. events, only the assigned time events  
operate as shown in the following table, and the remaining events operate as regular time  
events.  
Segment  
No.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
Event No.  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON  
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON  
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
Segment  
No.  
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30  
Event No.  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF  
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON  
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
PID set selection  
Eight sets of PID parameters, PID1 to PID8, are used for  
control operation. When the PID set No. is set to each seg-  
ment by designating the PID set segment, control output is  
calculated by each of the PID parameters.  
There are two ways of selecting PID sets: by designating the  
PID set segment and PID set auto-switching. The method  
can be selected by setting setup data C 1 1.  
PID set No.  
1
2
3
4
PID set segment designation  
C 1 1 set to 0: Designation of PID set segment  
C 1 1 set to 1: PID set auto-switching  
Zone 8  
Zone 7  
Zone 6  
These two methods cannot be set simultaneously.  
C P. 1 7  
C P. 1 6  
C P. 1 5  
C P. 1 4  
C P. 1 3  
C P. 1 2  
C P. 1 1  
Note  
When setup data C 1 1 is set to 1, PID items in the program  
setup are not displayed.  
All SP ranges  
are divided to  
eight zones.  
Zone 5  
Zone 4  
Zone 3  
Zone 2  
Zone 1  
By designation of PID set segment, the PID set No. is set for  
each segment, and control output is calculated by each of the  
PID parameters.  
By PID set auto-switching, the SP full-scale is divided into  
eight zones according to the settings of C P . 1 1 to C P . 1 7,  
and the PID constant to be used according to the SP value is  
automatically selected to calculate the control output.  
PID set automatic switching  
G.Soak (guarantee soak)  
G.Soak ON/OFF and G.Soak width can be set for each seg-  
ment. The G.Soak time can also be set by the variable param-  
eter G S . t item.  
SP  
The G.Soak function ensures a segment execution time with  
PV close to SP. G.Soak functions not only in soak segments  
but also in ramp segments.  
G.Soak width  
SP  
PV  
G.Soak width  
At the segment start point, PV and SP are compared, and the  
absolute value of the resulting deviation continues for the  
G.Soak time or longer. When the absolute value is smaller than  
the G.Soak width, operation of that segment is started.  
Segment set time  
Segment execution time  
G.Soak standby time  
Time count start  
Time  
The controller is in the G.Soak standby state until this condi-  
tion is satisfied, and the linear lamp on the left of the profile  
display blinks. The operation state is the same as hold at the  
segment start point (time is set to 0). However, note that in the  
FAST mode, the controller does not enter the G.Soak standby  
state even if G.Soak is set to ON. The G.Soak standby state  
can also be canceled by external switch output. The following  
cancel conditions can be selected by the setup date C 5 2 to  
C 5 4 settings.  
G.Soak at segment start point  
(1) G.Soak cancel when external switch input contact is ON or  
PV satisfies the G.Soak cancel conditions  
(2) G.Soak cancel when external switch input contact is ON  
and PV satisfies the G.Soak cancel conditions  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
PV start  
SP pattern  
If PV start is set in the program setup, PV is started by  
regular RUN operation.  
The first point where PV matches the SP in the program  
pattern (including bias for both PV and SP) is searched  
for, and operation is started from that point.  
Current  
PV value  
Start point  
A
A'  
(1)  
Start point  
However, note that if a matching point is not found, op-  
eration is started from the beginning of segment 1.  
Start point  
B
C
(1)'  
When PV has started, event operating points and the time  
of time events are automatically corrected. If the PV start  
function is selected by setup data C 5 2 to C 5 4 settings  
relating to external switch input, PV start can be executed  
without setting PV start in the program setup.  
(1)"  
PV start points  
PV start is valid for segments in the currently selected  
program, and invalid for the segment at the pattern link  
destination.  
(1) PV starts at point A where the PV value first  
crosses the SP pattern.  
(1)' PV starts at point B where the PV value first  
crosses the SP pattern.  
(1)'' Point C of segment 1 is the PV start point  
since there is no point where the PV value  
crosses the SP value.  
Cycle  
SP  
The cycle function is for repeating operation from the No.1  
segment of the program pattern to the final set segment  
for a preset number of cycles. The number of cycles can  
be set up to 9999.  
(5)  
Cycle 1  
(4)  
(3)  
When a number of cycles nis set, the operation count  
(6)  
becomes n+1.  
(2)  
(1)  
When executing cycle operation, operation at the end point  
of the final segment is not carried out, and operation is  
restarted with the settings of events 1 to 3 and time events  
1 to 5 cleared. At this time, PV is not started and opera-  
tion starts from the No.1 segment even if PV start is set.  
Time  
If the SPs at the pattern start and end points do not match,  
the SP changes in a stepped manner during cycle opera-  
tion.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
Pattern link  
Program No.2 pattern-linked to program No.1  
Program No.1  
SP  
pattern linkis a function for linking patterns together.  
The link destination program No. is set by the pattern  
link item.  
When the pattern link item is set to 0 (initial setting),  
patterns are not linked. When the No. of the current pro-  
gram itself is set to the pattern link item, this creates an  
endless loop.  
Time  
SP  
If the SPs at the link source end point and the link desti-  
nation start point do not match, the SP changes in a  
stepped manner during link operation.  
Program No.2  
Time  
When cycle operation has been set, the pattern link func-  
tion works after cycle operation has ended. After pattern  
link operation ends, operation begins from the No.1 seg-  
ment of the link destination pattern, so operation is re-  
started with the settings of events 1 to 3 and time events  
1 to 5 cleared.  
SP  
If PV start is programmed to the link destination pattern,  
the PV start function operates after the link is made.  
After the link has been made, PID operation is not ini-  
tialized, and is continued.  
Time  
Program No.1  
Program No.2  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
5-3 Modes  
I Mode types  
The following modes are available on the DCP301.  
Mode  
Program operation  
READY  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
RUN  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
HOLD  
FAST  
END  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
READY  
RUN  
Constant-value operation  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
I Program operation  
Operation is carried out according to SP, times, events, etc. set to program patterns No.1  
to 19.  
I Constant-value operation  
Operation is carried out according to SP or events set in the constant-value operation  
data. Time events 1 to 5 turn OFF.  
I READY  
In this mode, the DCP301 is ready for operation.  
MV output is fixed, and events to be operated according to event setting values turn OFF.  
However, events to be operated according to controller states are active.  
Parameters for all of the setup data, some event configuration data and some constant-  
value operation data can be set or changed in the READY mode. During program opera-  
tion, program pattern Nos.1 to 19 can be selected.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
I RUN  
In this mode, the program is running.  
MV outputs are active in PID control or ON-OFF control, and events and time events are  
active.  
In the program operation mode, program operation progresses according to the elapsed  
time.  
However, note that progress of program operation stops in the same way as the HOLD  
mode when the controller is in the G.Soak (Guarantee Soak) standby state.  
I HOLD  
In this mode, the program is held.  
Progress of program operation stops. However, note that MV outputs are active in PID  
control or ON-OFF control, and events and time events are active in the same way as in  
the RUN mode. The HOLD mode is not available during constant-value operation.  
I FAST  
In this mode, the program is fast-forwarded.  
This mode is like the RUN mode except that progress of the program operation time is  
speeded up.  
The time scale is selected by the variable parameter F A S T setting.  
MV outputs are active in PID control or ON-OFF control, and events and time events are  
active.  
The controller does not enter the G.Soak standby state even if G.Soak (Guarantee Soak)  
is set. The FAST mode is not available during constant-value operation.  
I END  
In this mode, operation of the program has ended.  
MV outputs are active in PID control or ON-OFF control, and events and time events are  
active with program operation stopped at the program end point.  
The END mode is not available during constant-value operation.  
I AUTO  
In this mode, program operation is automatic.  
MV output is active according to controller control.  
(However, note that when programmer functions are selected on 5G output models, SP  
output is active according to controller control.)  
I MANUAL  
In this mode, program operation is manual.  
MV output can be changed by  
(However, note that when programmer functions are selected on 5G output models, SP  
output can be changed by on the console or communications.)  
,
,
,
on the console or communications.  
,
,
,
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
I Mode transition  
I During program operation  
The solid lines in the following diagram show mode transition operations. The broken  
lines show end of operation.  
ADV  
ADV  
ADV  
RESET  
RESET  
RUN  
RESET  
HOLD  
RUN  
END AUTO  
READY AUTO  
RUN AUTO  
RUN MANUAL  
HOLD AUTO  
END MANUAL  
READY MANUAL  
HOLD MANUAL  
FAST  
FAST  
HOLD  
RUN  
FAST AUTO  
FAST MANUAL  
RESET  
ADV  
Mode changes to READY or END at end of operation.  
• When shifting between the AUTO and MANUAL modes, the modes in the square  
frames can be shifted between.  
Note  
• Selection of the READY or END modes at end of operation is set up in the setup data.  
I During constant-value operation  
The solid lines in the following diagram shows mode transition operation.  
RUN  
READY AUTO  
RUN AUTO  
RESET  
READY MANUAL  
RUN MANUAL  
When shifting between the AUTO and MANUAL modes, the modes in the square frames  
can be shifted between.  
Note  
I Switching between program operation and constant-value operation  
In the READY mode, select operation by the constant-value operation data “M .O D E”  
operation mode item.  
0: Program operation  
1: Constant-value operation  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
I Mode transition operations  
The following describes mode transition operations.  
Though program endis not an operation, it is described below as it is a factor in mode  
transition.  
I RUN  
This operation involves shifting to the RUN mode from the READY, HOLD or FAST  
modes. To shift from the READY mode to the RUN mode, the DCP301 must be in the  
basic display state even in key, external switch input or communication operations.  
I HOLD  
This operation involves shifting to the HOLD mode from the RUN or FAST modes.  
The HOLD mode is not available in the constant-value operation mode.  
I RESET  
This operation involves shifting to the READY mode from the RUN, HOLD, FAST or  
END modes.  
In the program operation mode, this mode includes returning to the No.1 segment.  
I ADV  
This operation involves advancing one segment in the READY, RUN, HOLD or FAST  
modes.  
The ADV mode is not available in the constant-value operation mode.  
I FAST  
This operation involves shifting to the FAST mode from the RUN or HOLD modes.  
The FAST mode is not available in the constant-value operation mode.  
I AUTO  
This operation involves shifting to the AUTO mode from the MANUAL mode.  
This operation involves shifting to the MANUAL mode from the AUTO mode.  
I MANUAL  
When the DCP301 enters the MANUAL mode, the basic display state changes as fol-  
lows.  
- When controller functions are selected, PV and output value (%) are displayed.  
- When programmer functions are selected, PV and SP are displayed.  
When the DCP301 enters the MANUAL mode from the AUTO mode by external switch  
inputs or communications, the display changes to the basic display state even in the pa-  
rameter setup or program setup states.  
I Program end  
When operation progresses in the RUN or FAST modes in the program operation mode,  
or when the segment has been advanced in the ADV mode, the program ends when all  
end points in the program setup including cycles and pattern links have been reached.  
You can select in the setup setting in which of the READY or END modes program  
operation ends.  
The program does not end in the constant-value operation mode.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
I Mode transition limitations  
Mode transition can be carried out operating the console keys, external switching input  
and communications. The following table shows which operations are enabled in each of  
the modes.  
Operation  
RUN  
HOLD  
RESET  
ADV *  
FAST  
(to RUN mode) (to HOLD mode) (to READY mode) (to next segment mode) (to FAST mode)  
Com-  
muni-  
cations  
Com-  
muni-  
cations  
Com-  
muni-  
cations  
Com-  
muni-  
cations  
Com-  
muni-  
cations  
Key  
Key  
Key  
Key  
Key  
Switch  
Switch  
Switch  
Switch  
Switch  
Original mode  
Program READY  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
operation  
RUN  
I
I
I
I
I
I
HOLD  
FAST  
END  
Constant-  
value  
operation  
READY  
RUN  
Operation  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
(to MANUAL mode) (to AUTO mode)  
Com-  
muni-  
cations  
Com-  
muni-  
cations  
Key  
Key  
Switch  
Switch  
Original mode  
AUTO  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Program  
operation  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Constant-  
value  
operation  
MANUAL  
I : Operation is enabled.  
: Operation is enabled if in basic display state.  
: No.1 segment is returned to if controller is still in READY mode.  
: Operation is disabled.  
* With ADV by communications, mode transition is not limited to the next segment; the  
mode advances to the segment specified in the communications message.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
5-4 Controller and Programmer  
On 5G output models (output catalog No. appended with 5G), you can choose between use as a controller or a  
programmer. Set this in setup data C 1 8. You can also choose between controller or programmer functions even if  
the DCP301 is used for program operation or constant-value operation.  
The DCP301 is limited to use as a controller at all times on other models.  
I Controller  
When the DCP301 is used as a controller, PID control operation is carried out according  
to PV, SP AND PID setting values, and the resulting manipulated variable (MV) is out-  
put as an analog output.  
ON-OFF control, heat/cool PID control and 3-position-proportional is also possible de-  
pending on the type of output supported by the model of DCP301.  
In the MANUAL mode, the MV can be incremented or decremented in the basic display  
state by the console keys.  
DCP301 controller  
MV  
PV  
Controlled system  
I Programmer  
When the DCP301 is used as a programmer, PID control operation is not carried out, and  
the SP is output in the scaled 4 to 20mA range.  
In the MANUAL mode, the SP can be incremented or decremented in the basic display  
state by the console keys.  
DCP301 programmer  
SP output  
PV  
4 to 20mA  
RSP input  
Controller  
Controller  
Controller  
MV  
Controlled system  
MV  
Controlled system  
MV  
Controlled system  
PV  
PV  
PV  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
5-5 Input Processing Functions  
Input processing is carried out in the order shown below.  
Analog input 1  
Input range type  
Setting: Setup data C03  
A/D conversion  
Wiring resistance compensation (resistance temperature detector)  
(thermocouple)  
Cold junction compensation  
Setting: Setup data C72  
(DC current and voltage)  
Square-root extraction  
Setting: Setup data C07  
(DC current and voltage)  
Upper/lower limit value scaling  
Setting: Setup data C04 to C06  
(thermocouple and resistance temperature detector)  
Temperature unit range  
Upper/lower limit alarm  
Linearization approximation  
Bias  
Setting: Setup data C02  
Setting: Setup data C08  
Table data T-A. 1 to T-B.B  
Setting: Variable parameter PBi  
Digital filter  
Setting: Variable parameter FL  
PV1  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
5-6 Output Processing Functions  
Three outputs are provided as output processing functions: control output, SP output and auxiliary output.  
I Control output  
When the DCP301 is selected for use as a controller, control output is operational. How  
outputs are processed varies according to the output type supported on the model.  
I 5G output  
Initialization of PID control  
operation  
Setting: Variable parameters 1 OUT/rpi d  
Setting: PID parameters p/ 1 / d/8E  
PID parameters dP/di /dd  
PID parameters br  
PID control operation  
Output change limitter  
Setting: Variable parameters OTL  
Setting: Variable parameter AT  
AT operation  
AT execution  
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH  
Output upper/lower limit limitter  
Setting: Setup data C 12/C 13  
MV at over-range  
Over-range  
Setting: Setup data C 16  
MV in READY mode  
READY mode  
Setting: Setup data C 14/C 15  
Preset manual value  
Manual MV  
MANUAL mode  
Manipulated variable (MV1)  
Output 1  
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
I 0D, 6D output  
Initialization of PID control operation  
PID control operation  
Setting: Variable parameters 1 OUT/rpi d  
Setting: PID parameters p/ 1 / d/RE  
PID parameters dP/di /dd  
PID parameters br  
Output change limitter  
Setting: Variable parameters OTL  
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH  
Output upper/lower limit limitter  
ON/OFF control operation  
ON/OFF control  
Setting: Variable parameter DI FF  
AT operation  
Setting: Variable parameter AT  
Setting: Setup data C 12/C 13  
Setting: Setup data C 16  
AT execution  
Over-range  
MV at over-range  
MV in READY mode  
READY mode  
Preset manual value  
Manual MV  
Setting: Setup data C 14/C 15  
Handling Precautions  
In ON-OFF control, the DCP301  
cannot be set to the MANUAL  
mode. (The DCP301 can be set to  
the MANUAL mode as ON-OFF  
control is not possible in the  
READY mode.)  
MANUAL mode  
Manipulated variable (MV1)  
Output 1 time-proportional output cycle  
Setting: Variable parameter Cy. 1  
(6D output)  
Setting: Setup data C78  
Voltage output 1 adjustment  
Output 1  
Time-proportional relay output  
Time-proportional voltage output  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
I 2G output  
Initialization of PID control operation  
Setting: Variable parameters 1 OUT/rpi d  
PID control operation  
Output change limitter  
Setting: PID parameters p/ 1 / d/RE  
PID parameters dP/di /dd  
PID parameters br  
Setting: Variable parameters OTL  
Setting: Variable parameter AT  
AT operation  
AT execution  
Output upper/lower limit limitter  
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH  
MV at over-range  
Setting: Setup data C 12/C 13  
Setting: Setup data C 16  
Over-range  
MV in READY mode  
READY mode  
Preset manual value  
Setting: Setup data C 14/C 15  
Manual MV  
MANUAL mode  
MFB automatic adjustment  
MFB automatic  
Setting: Variable parameter M.-AT  
adjustment execution  
Manipulated variable (MV1)  
Motor control method selection  
MFB operation  
Setting: Variable parameter M.-C  
Setting: Variable parameters M.-CL/M.-OP/M.-T  
Motor control operation  
Setting: Variable parameter DI FF  
Output 1  
open-side relay  
Output 1  
closed-side relay  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
I 3D, 5K outputs  
Initialization of PID control operation  
PID control operation  
Setting: Variable parameters 1 OUT/rpi d  
Setting: PID parameters p/ 1 / d/RE  
Output change limitter  
Setting: Variable parameters OTL  
MV at over-range  
Setting: Setup data C 12/C 13  
Over-range  
50%  
READY mode  
Setting: Setup data C 14/C 15  
Preset manual value  
Handling Precautions  
Manual MV  
In 3-position control, the DCP301 cannot be set to the  
MANUAL mode  
MANUAL mode  
Manipulated variable (MV1)  
Heat-cool MV operation  
Setting: Variable parameter DI FF  
Heat-side  
Output upper/lower limit limitter  
Cool-side  
Output upper/lower limit limitter  
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH  
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH  
(even-numbered PID sets)  
(odd-numbered PID sets)  
3-position control operation  
3-position control operation  
Setting: Setup data  
C45  
Setting: Setup data  
C45  
3-position control  
3-position control  
Variable parameters  
Dv-L/HY-L  
Variable parameters  
Dv-H/HY-H  
MV in READY mode (heat)  
MV in READY mode (cool)  
READY/AUTO modes Setting: Setup data C 1 7  
Setting: Setup data C 16  
READY/AUTO modes  
MV (heat)  
MV (cool)  
Output 1 time-proportional output cycle  
Output 2 time-proportional output cycle  
(relay/voltage output)  
(relay/voltage output)  
Setting: Variable parameter CY.2  
Setting: Variable parameter CY. 1  
Voltage output 1 adjustment  
Voltage output 2 adjustment  
(voltage output)  
(voltage output)  
Setting: Setup data C78  
Setting: Setup data C79  
Output 2  
Time-proportional relay output  
Output 1  
Time-proportional relay output  
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)  
Time-proportional voltage output  
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)  
Time-proportional voltage output  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS  
I SP output  
When the DCP301 is selected for use as a programmer, control output is operational. On  
5G output models, SP output is processed is as follows.  
Main output types  
Setting: Setup data C 18  
Upper/lower limit scaling  
Setting: Setup data C 19/C20  
Setting: Setup data C 16  
MV in READY mode  
READY mode  
Manual SP1  
Upper/lower limit scaling  
Setting: Setup data C 19/C20  
MANUAL mode  
SP1 output  
Output 1  
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)  
I Auxiliary output  
I Auxiliary output 1  
When auxiliary output 1 or 2 are supported on 0D, 5G or 6D output models, auxiliary  
output 1 is processed as follows.  
Auxiliary output 1 type  
Setting: Setup data C46  
Upper/lower limit scaling  
Setting: Setup data C47/C48  
When READY mode is entered at auxiliary output  
type SP and deviation  
4mA (0mA)  
When auxiliary output type is NOP  
When auxiliary output type is set to MFB on non-  
2G output models  
When auxiliary output type is set to MV by program-  
mer function on 5G output models  
Output 2  
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)  
I Auxiliary output 2  
When auxiliary output 2 is supported on 0D, 5G or 6D output models, auxiliary output 2  
is processed as follows.  
When auxiliary output 1 is supported on 2G, 3D or 5K output models, auxiliary output 2  
is processed as follows.  
Auxiliary output 2 type  
Setting: Setup data C49  
Setting: Setup data C50/C51  
Upper/lower limit scaling  
When READY mode is entered at auxiliary output  
type SP and deviation  
4mA (0mA)  
When auxiliary output type is NOP  
When auxiliary output type is set to MFB on non-2G  
output models  
When auxiliary output type is set to MV by program-  
mer function on 5G output models  
When auxiliary output type is set to MV by 3-position-  
proportional control on 3D output models  
Output 3  
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
6-1 Turning the Power ON  
The DCP301 is not equipped with a power switch or protective fuses. If necessary, prepare these externally.  
When a voltage of 90 to 264Vac is applied across terminals (1) and (2) on the DCP301, display appears for about 10s  
after which control and other operations are started. During controller startup until start of operations, the LEDs on  
the profile display light successively at uneven intervals clockwise from top right. The following diagram shows the  
flow of operations at startup.  
G Startup flow  
Power ON  
NO  
RAM backup normal?  
YES  
Check start of general reset  
ENT  
Press  
key.  
Continuation of program operation/constant-value oper-  
ation modes  
Parameter=factory shipment setting  
Delete entire program.  
Program operation mode  
READY mode  
Continuation of READY/RUN/HOLD/FAST/END modes  
Continuation of AUTO/MANUAL modes  
(Continuation of manual value if in MANUAL mode)  
Continuation of program No./segment No.  
Continuation of segment progress time  
AUTO mode  
Program No.1=1/segment No.=1  
Segment progress time=0  
Continuation of display No. of basic display state in  
AUTO mode  
Cancellation of auto-tuning/smart-tuning  
Cancellation of MFB automatic adjustment by 2G output  
Initialization of G.Soak standby time  
Initialization of PID operation  
Initialization of event output state  
Setting display state Basic display state  
Display No. of basic display state in MANUAL mode  
Start of operations  
Handling Precautions  
With the following modes and items, the state when the power is turned OFF  
continues when the power is turned back ON.  
• READY, RUN, HOLD, FAST, END modes  
• AUTO, MANUAL modes  
• MANUAL values in MANUAL mode  
• Program No., segment No.  
• Progress time in segment  
• Display No. if in basic display state in AUTO mode  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
6-2 Switching the Basic Display  
The “basic display state” of the controller collectively refers to the display state of the program No. display, segment  
No. display, upper display, lower display, basic indicator LED lamps and event LEDs.  
DISP  
Each press of  
successively switches the basic display state. Operation of other displays and LEDs is carried out  
DISP  
in the same way even when setting up parameters, for example. However, switching by  
is not possible.  
The following figure shows the conventions used for displays in this manual.  
Program/segment No. Display  
In the program operation mode,  
READY indicates the currently selected program/segment No.  
Displays other than READY indicate the currently operating program/seg-  
ment No.  
In the constant-value operation mode, nothing is displayed and this dis-  
play is blank.  
Basic indicator LED lamps  
: LED lit  
: LED blinking  
PV  
Program No. Segment No.  
PV  
SP  
Upper display  
Lower display  
SP  
Pattern  
tendency  
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
Event LEDs  
Supplementary explanation  
Profile Display  
In the program operation mode, the profile is displayed only when the program has been set up.  
The profile is not displayed when the program is not set up.  
When there is no subsequent segment even if the program is set up, the three LEDs on the right do  
not light. In the constant-value operation mode, nothing is displayed and this display is blank.  
(1)  
(4)  
Falling ramp  
Rising ramp  
Current segment  
(2) Soak  
(5) Soak  
Next segment  
(6)  
(3) Rising ramp  
Falling ramp  
PROFILE  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
G Display in program operation mode  
DISP  
G
functions  
Output Model No.  
Display  
0D, 5G, 6D  
Display 1 Display 2 Display 5 Display 6 Display 7 →  
Display 1 (repeated)  
2G  
Display 1 Display 2 Display 3 Display 5 Display 6 →  
Display 7 Display 1 (repeated)  
3D, 5K  
Display 1 Display 2 Display 4 Display 5 Display 6 →  
Display 7 Display 1 (repeated)  
G Display 1  
PV  
Program No. Segment No.  
PV  
SP  
SP  
Pattern  
tendency  
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when pro-  
grammer functions are selected.  
G Display 2  
PV  
Program No. Segment No.  
PV  
OUT  
Pattern  
tendency  
Output value (%)  
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when control-  
ler functions are selected.  
G Display 3  
Program No. Segment No.  
F B  
Pattern  
tendency  
Motor valve opening (%)  
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
This display is exclusive to 2G output models (output catalog No. appended with 2G).  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
G Display 4  
Program No. Segment No.  
Heat-side output (%)  
Cool-side output (%)  
OUT  
Pattern  
tendency  
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
This display is exclusive to heat/cool output models (output catalog No. appended with  
3D or 5K).  
G Display 5  
PV  
Program No. Segment No.  
PV  
TM  
Pattern  
tendency  
Time  
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
Either of h:minor min:sis selected as the time unit in setup settings. Select either  
remaining segment timeor total operating timein setup settings as the details whose  
time is to be displayed.  
G Display 6  
PV  
Program No. Segment No.  
PV  
CYC  
Pattern  
tendency  
Number of remaining cycles  
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
When the remaining number of cycles is 0, subsequent cycle operation is not carried  
out.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
G Display 7  
Program No. Segment No.  
SP  
SP  
TM  
Pattern  
tendency  
Time  
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when pro-  
grammer functions are selected. Either of h:minor min:sis selected as the time unit  
in setup settings. Select either remaining segment timeor total operating timein  
setup settings as the details whose time is to be displayed.  
G Display in constant-value operation mode  
DISP  
G
functions  
Output Model No.  
Display  
0D, 5G, 6D  
2G  
Display 1 Display 2 Display 1 (repeated)  
Display 1 Display 2 Display 3 Display 1 (repeated)  
Display 1 Display 2 Display 4 Display 1 (repeated)  
3D, 5K  
G Display 1  
PV  
PV  
SP  
SP  
Output state of events 1 to 3  
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when control-  
ler functions are selected.  
G Display 2  
PV  
PV  
OUT  
Output value (%)  
Output state of events 1 to 3  
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when pro-  
grammer functions are selected.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
G Display 3  
F B  
Motor valve opening (%)  
Output state of events 1 to 3  
This display is exclusive to 2G output models (output catalog No. appended with 2G).  
G Display 4  
Heat-side output (%)  
OUT  
Cool-side output (%)  
Output state of events 1 to 3  
This display is exclusive to heat/cool output models (output catalog No. appended with  
3D or 5K).  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
6-3 Program Selection  
The program No. can be selected on the console within the range 1 to 19.  
G How to select the program No.  
When the controller is in the basic display state in the  
program operation READY mode:  
Program No.1  
PROG  
Each press of  
increments the program No. The  
PROG  
display reverts to 1 after 19.  
key  
key  
key  
Each press of  
decrements the program No. The  
Program No.2  
display reverts to 19 after 1.  
PROG  
key  
Program No.3  
Program No.4  
PROG  
key  
key  
Handling Precautions  
Both already set or non-set program Nos. can be selected  
The program No. cannot be selected when selecting the program No. by exter-  
nal switch input.  
The program No. cannot be selected during constant-value operation.  
Pressing  
does not change the program No. when values currently being  
entered are displayed in the MANUAL mode.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
6-4 External Switch (RSW) Operations  
G External switch (RSW) inputs  
In all, the DCP301 is provided with 12 external switch inputs. Each of these inputs are  
differentiated by RSW1, RSW2 and so forth to RSW12. On models whose option 2 cata-  
log No. is 0, only inputs RSW1 to RSW4 are mounted.  
(RSW: external switch input)  
G External switch input types  
The functions of RSW1 to 4, and RSW8 to 12 are fixed.  
The functions of RSW5 to 7 are selected by the setup setting.  
External  
Function  
Detection Method  
Switch No.  
RSW1  
RSW2  
RSW3  
RSW4  
RUN  
Rising edge  
Rising edge  
Rising edge  
Rising edge  
HOLD  
RESET  
ADV  
Selected by setup from the following functions  
FAST  
RSW5  
RSW6  
RSW7  
Rising edge  
Rising edge  
Rising/falling edge  
Rising/falling edge  
Status  
PV start  
AUTO/MANUAL  
AT start/stop  
G.Soak cancel by OR conditions  
G.Soak cancel by AND conditions  
Direct/reverse action switching  
Status  
Status  
RSW8  
Program No. selection  
Program No. selection  
Program No. selection  
Program No. selection  
Program No. selection  
Weighting 1  
Weighting 2  
Weighting 4  
Weighting 8  
Weighting 10  
Status  
RSW9  
Status  
RSW10  
RSW11  
RSW12  
Status  
Status  
Status  
With PV is valid only in the program operation mode and READY mode, and the PV  
start RUN mode is entered regardless of the PV start setting in the program.  
Note, however, that RUN mode is entered from the start point of the selected segment  
in READY mode when there is no SP for the PV start.  
With G.Soak cancel by OR conditions, G.Soak standby is canceled when the external  
switch turns ON or when the PV enters the G.Soak width.  
With G.Soak cancel by AND conditions, G.Soak standby is canceled when the exter-  
nal switch turns ON or when the PV enters the G.Soak width.  
When the external switch turns ON by direct/reverse action switching, control opera-  
tion is the opposite to that set in setup parameter C 0 1. When the external switch  
turned OFF, control operation is that set in setup parameter C 0 1.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
G Program selection  
The program can be selected in the program operation READY mode. The table below  
shows program selection by external switch inputs. Two external switch states are pro-  
vided for selection of programs 10 to 15. When program selection by external switch  
inputs is set to 0, the program can be selected by the console keys and by communica-  
tion with a personal computer.  
External  
Weighting  
State  
Switch No.  
RSW8  
RSW9  
RSW10  
RSW11  
RSW12  
1
2
4
8
10  
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON  
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
Program No. Selection  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
External  
Weighting  
State  
Switch No.  
RSW8  
RSW9  
RSW10  
RSW11  
RSW12  
1
2
4
8
10  
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON  
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON  
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON  
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF  
Program No. Selection  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
External  
Weighting  
State  
Switch No.  
RSW8  
RSW9  
RSW10  
RSW11  
RSW12  
1
2
4
8
10  
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON  
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON  
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON  
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
Program No. Selection  
16 17 18 19  
0
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
G Read timing  
G Timing of RSW1 to 7  
Inputs RSW1 to RSW7 are read according to the following timing.  
(1) When input changes state from OFF to ON, the time from the change up to reading is  
0.2s max.  
(2) When input changes state from ON to OFF, the time from the change up to reading is  
0.2s max.  
ON read  
OFF read  
External switch input state  
(1)  
(2)  
G Timing of RSW8 to 12, RUN and PV start  
The time from the change in input state up to reading when selecting program Nos. by  
RSW8 to RSW12 is 0.4s max.  
Accordingly, due to the relationship with RUN operation, be sure to observe timings G  
to (4) in the following diagram.  
PV start operation also must conform to RUN operation.  
(1) The time from fixing of the selected No. up to the rising edge of the RUN signal is  
0.4s min.  
(2) The time from the rising edge of the RUN signal up to holding of the program No. is  
0.2s min.  
(3) The time from holding of RUN signal OFF up to the rising edge of the RUN signal is  
0.2s min.  
(4) The time from the rising edge of the RUN signal up to holding of RUN signal ON is  
0.2s min.  
(5) The time from fixing of the selected No. up to changing of the program No. is 0.4s  
max.  
(6) The time from the rising edge of the RUN signal up to start of RUN is 0.4s max.  
Program selection No.  
(5 inputs)  
State of  
selected No.  
State of No. di  
from that selec  
State of No. different  
from that selected  
(1)  
(2)  
RUN signal  
(3)  
(4)  
(6)  
(5)  
Program No.  
No. different from that selected  
Selected No.  
Handling Precautions  
When operating the controller by external switch inputs, operation can be carried  
out more reliably if a margin is added to the minimum time for the above read  
times.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
6-5 Manual Operation and Auto-tuning  
G Manual operation  
In the MANUAL mode, controller outputs can be manipulated by  
sole.  
or  
on the con-  
G Controller functions  
When outputs are displayed in the basic display state, only one digit in the output value  
blinks. If the output value is incremented or decremented by or , actual output  
also increments or decrements. Output values differ from values being entered to setting  
ENT  
items in that  
need not be pressed.  
The blinking digit can be moved by pressing  
or  
.
On 2G output models, when only estimated position-proportional control is selected by  
variable parameter M .-C setting 2, “——” not the value is displayed as the output dis-  
play in the MANUAL mode.  
Pressing  
Pressing  
displays O p e n, and the open-side relay turns ON.  
displays C l O S, and the closed-side relay turns ON.  
Bump-less and preset output changes when shifting from the AUTO to the MANUAL  
mode can be selected by setup parameter C 15 setting. When shifting from the MANUAL  
to the AUTO mode, output is bumpless.  
(However, when the total time for the PID parameter of the PID set in use is set to 0, a  
sudden change in output occurs.)  
G Programmer functions  
On 5G output models, when programmer functions are in operation with setup data C 18  
setting 1, SP can be manually manipulated. When SP is displayed in the basic display  
state, only one digit in the SP value being entered blinks. When the SP value is incremented  
or decremented by  
or  
, the actual SP output also increments or decrements. SP  
ENT  
values differ from values being entered to setting items in that  
need not be pressed.  
The blinking digit can be moved by pressing or  
.
Output changes when shifting from the AUTO to the MANUAL mode are bumpless  
regardless of setup data C 15 setting. When shifting from the MANUAL to the AUTO  
mode, the SP becomes the program pattern SP, which results in a sudden change in out-  
put.  
G Auto-tuning (AT)  
When operating in the AUTO mode in either of the RUN, HOLD, FAST or END modes,  
setting values can be automatically written to the PID set in use by auto-tuning (AT). The  
following can be selected by variable parameter A t setting.  
0:AT is disabled.  
1:General AT is executed.  
2:Overshoot-inhibited AT is executed.  
3:AT by neural net is executed.  
Auto-tuning does not function when programmer functions are selected on 3D or 5K  
heat/cool output models and 5G output models.  
During execution of auto-tuning, progress of program operation time stops. Accord-  
ingly, the controller is in a similar state to the HOLD mode even in the RUN or FAST  
modes.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. OPERATION  
Auto-tuning in all instances involves calculating the downtime and critical sensitivity  
of the line according to two limit cycles and PID values according to suitable charac-  
teristic equations for each, and automatically writing these PID values.  
During execution of auto-tuning, PV fluctuates according to fluctuations in MV. Be-  
fore executing auto-tuning, make sure that fluctuations in PV will not cause controller  
trouble.  
Normally, suitable values are written by setting variable parameter At setting to 1 or 3.  
However, when executing auto-tuning on a line that easily overshoots, either set to 2,  
or also use smart-tuning for carrying out overshoot inhibit control. Setting to 3 ex-  
ecutes AT by neural net so that the suitable value is calculated for wider range applica-  
tions.  
The point at which output at auto-tuning is inverted (lower limit to upper limit, and  
vice versa) is determined as follows from SP and PV at start of auto-tuning.  
At start  
At SP=PV operation  
PV  
PV  
SP  
PV>SP  
2/3  
1/3  
1/3  
SP  
2/3  
PV<SP  
Time  
Time  
AT start  
Normal end  
AT start  
Normal end  
AT  
Auto-tuning can be started by  
, external switch inputs and communications. Dur-  
ing auto-tuning, the AT LED blinks.  
If one or more of the following conditions occurs during auto-tuning, auto-tuning is  
canceled without PID constants being written, and the AT LED goes out.  
AT  
- Cancel by  
- Cancel by external switch input  
- Cancel by communications  
- Change in mode (shift to MANUAL mode or READY mode)  
- Execution of automatic motor valve opening adjustment on 2G output models  
- When variable parameter A t setting is changed to 0”  
- When input 1 becomes out-of-range  
Handling Precautions  
Auto-tuning will not function properly unless the control target is connected.  
The time from start to end of auto-tuning varies according to the control target.  
When auto-tuning is executed, control is stopped, OFF and ON outputs are  
switched in the case of relay output and voltage output, and the manipulated  
variable upper and lower limits of the currently selected PID set are switched  
several times in the case of current output and position proportional output. If  
this causes controller trouble, manually set the PID value.  
Sometimes a suitable PID value cannot be obtained depending on the control  
target. If this happens, manually set the PID value.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
7-1 Parameter Setup  
Parameters can be set up when the DCP301 is in the basic display state.  
DISP  
If the DCP301 is not in the basic display state, press  
to set the controller to the basic display state.  
Selecting the setting group in the parameter setup  
Parameter setup is divided into two stages: setting group (major item) and individual  
item (minor item).  
FUNC  
PARA  
If you press  
+
in the basic display state, the display changes to selection of  
setting group (major item), the setting group is displayed on the upper display, and the  
lower display goes out.  
PARA  
If you press  
,
or  
, the setting group display changes in order.  
Basic Display State  
DISP  
FUNC  
PARA  
key  
+
keys  
ENT  
key  
key  
Setting group 1 (major items) selection  
Individual items  
PARA  
PARA  
,
,
,
,
key  
key  
key  
key  
key  
ENT  
key  
key  
Setting group 2 (major items) selection  
Individual items  
PARA  
,
,
PARA  
key  
key  
key  
ENT  
key  
key  
Setting group n (major items) selection  
Individual items  
PARA  
PARA  
,
,
,
key  
key  
key  
key  
ENT  
If you press  
when the setup group to be selected is displayed, the display moves to  
the individual (minor) item level.  
The following table shows the setting groups.  
Upper  
Display  
Name  
Remarks  
Variable param-  
eters  
P A R A  
Event configuration  
data  
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 2 or 4  
E V  
PID parameters  
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 2 or 4  
This parameter is not displayed when constant-value operation data  
M .O D E is 1  
P 1 D  
This parameter is not displayed when setup data C 1 8 is 1 by 5G output  
This parameter is not displayed when setup data C 4 5 is 1 by 3D output  
Setup data  
Table data  
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 1, 2 or 4  
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 2 or 4  
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 2 or 4  
S E T  
T B L  
Constant-value  
operation data  
C N S T  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Moving individual items in the parameter setup  
With individual items, item codes are displayed in the upper display and setting values  
are displayed in the lower display.  
The program No. display goes out, and the item No. is displayed in the segment No.  
display. However, note that the segment No. display also goes out in the case of setup  
data.  
Individual items are arranged in a matrix as shown on the following page, and can be  
displayed in order by pressing  
,
,
or  
. The size of individual item matri-  
ces varies according to the setting group.  
Changing individual items and how to return from the setup state  
ENT  
If you press  
when an individual item is displayed, the setting value blinks. This state  
is referred to as the “setting value entry state.” In this state, pressing  
crement or decrement the setting value that is blinking. Also, pressing  
the position of the digit that is blinking.  
or  
or  
can in-  
moves  
ENT  
If you press  
when the setting value is at the desired value, blinking stops, the display  
returns to its normally lit state, and the new setting value is stored to internal memory.  
PARA  
PARA  
DISP  
To cancel changing of setting values, press  
or  
. When  
is pressed, the value  
stops blinking and the display returns to its normal lit state.  
DISP  
If you press  
, the display returns to the basic display state. If “- - - -” is displayed at  
the lower display when an individual item is displayed, or the controller does not enter  
ENT  
the setting value entry state by pressing  
, that item cannot be set nor changed.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
• Example of individual item matrix (setup date)  
C 0 0  
C 9 1  
C 9 2  
C 9 3  
C 0 1  
C 0 2  
C 0 3  
C 1 1  
C 1 2  
C 1 3  
C 8 1  
C 8 2  
C 8 3  
C 9 1  
C 9 2  
C 9 3  
C 0 1  
C 0 2  
C 0 3  
C 9 9  
C 0 0  
C 0 9  
C 1 9  
C 2 0  
C 8 9  
C 9 0  
C 9 9  
C 0 0  
C 0 1  
C 0 9  
C 1 0  
C 1 0  
DISP  
key  
Basic Display State  
DISP  
key  
ENT  
ENT  
key,  
key,  
key  
key  
key  
key  
key  
Setting group selection  
(major items)  
Individual items  
(minor items)  
Setting value  
blinking  
ENT  
PARA  
PARA  
*
key  
key,  
Change setting value.  
key  
key  
key  
key  
Individual items  
(minor items)  
key  
key  
key  
key  
ENT  
*
stores setting values to memory.  
PARA  
does not store setting values to memory.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
PARA  
7-2 How to Use  
PARA  
Use  
for calling up individual items in frequently changed parameters.  
How to register functions to keys  
PARA  
Up to eight individual items in the parameter setup can be assigned to each  
assignment item must be registered to use this feature.  
key. The  
This feature allows you to call up individual items more easily in the following order:  
FUNC  
PARA  
+
selection of setting group individual item matrix.  
How to register assignment items  
To register an assignment item, add the following base corresponding to the setting group  
PARA  
to the item No., and then set the resultant value to setup data C 5 5 to C 6 2 (  
assign-  
ment items 1 to 8)).  
Base  
Setting Group  
1000 Constant-value operation data  
1500 PID parameters  
2500 Variable parameters  
3500 Event configuration data  
4000 Table data  
4500 Setup data  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Example  
PARA  
Let’s register four individual items to PARA . If you press  
in the basic display state,  
the 1st to 4th individual items in the table below are displayed successively. In this ex-  
ample, let’s change the setting values.  
PARA  
Order  
Item to Call by  
Setup data  
1
2
3
4
C 0 1  
P -2  
F L  
PID parameter  
Variable parameter  
Variable parameter  
F A S T  
The settings for registering these individual items are as follows.  
Setup Data Setting “S E t”  
Item Code  
No. [auxiliary  
display]  
Setting  
Value  
Item  
Remarks  
PARA  
55  
assignment  
C 5 5  
4501  
This is produced by adding item No.1  
item 1  
of C 0 1 to setup data radical 4500.  
PARA  
C 5 6  
56  
assignment 1511  
This is produced by adding item No.11  
item 2  
of P -2 to PID parameter radical 1500.  
PARA  
57 C 5 7  
assignment 2503  
This is produced by adding item No.3  
item 3  
of F L to setup data radical 2500.  
PARA  
58 C 5 8  
assignment 2520  
This is produced by adding item No.20  
of F A S T to variable parameter  
radical 2500.  
item 4  
Handling Precautions  
• For details on item Nos., see 7-3 Parameter Setup List (pages 7-7 to 7-42).  
PARA  
• When the “  
assignment itemsetting is set to a value that does not corre-  
spond to an existing item, that setting is ignored.  
For example, though factory setting 1000 corresponds to constant-value op-  
eration data0th of base 1000, 0th does not exist, so the setting will be treated  
an invalid data and will not be registered.  
PARA  
Operations by  
PARA  
If you press  
Each press of  
in the basic display state, registered individual items are called up.  
successively calls up (up to eight) registered individual items. Only  
PARA  
individual items to which valid assignment settings have been registered can be called  
up.  
PARA  
operations are not limited by the setting of “variable parameter setup” L O C (key  
PARA  
lock) setting.  
operations are described on the following page.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
DISP  
DISP  
key  
key  
ENT  
ENT  
Display item by  
Display item by  
PARA  
key  
key  
Basic Display  
State  
key  
PARA  
PARA  
key assign-  
key assign-  
ment item 1  
(normally lit)  
ment item 1  
(blinking)*  
PARA  
PARA  
key  
key  
ENT  
ENT  
Display item by  
key assign-  
ment item 2  
Display item by  
DISP  
key  
key  
PARA  
PARA  
key  
key  
key assign-  
ment item 2  
(normally lit)  
(blinking)  
*
PARA  
PARA  
key  
key  
ENT  
ENT  
Display item by  
Display item by  
DISP  
key  
key  
PARA  
PARA  
Max. 8 items  
key assign-  
key assign-  
ment item 3  
ment item 3  
(normally lit)  
(blinking)*  
PARA  
PARA  
key  
key  
ENT  
ENT  
Display item by  
key assign-  
ment item 8  
Display item by  
DISP  
key  
key  
PARA  
PARA  
key  
key assign-  
ment item 8  
(normally lit)  
(blinking)*  
PARA  
PARA  
key  
key  
Handling Precautions  
When invalid assignments are registered, that item is  
skipped and the next registered item is displayed.  
* Items that can be changed: When these items are displayed blinking, the setting  
values can be changed by  
,
,
and  
.
ENT  
stores data to memory.  
Items for reference:  
These are displayed at all times.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
7-3 Parameter Setup List  
“U” and “%FS” used in the “Factory Setting” and “Setting” columns in the table mean  
the following:  
Note  
U:  
The decimal point changes according to the input range type setting. For example,  
when one digit past the decimal point is allowed, -1999U becomes 199.9, and  
9999U becomes 999.9.  
%FS: The numbers and decimal point position changes according to the input range setting.  
For example, when the input range is 0.0 to 800.0°C, 0%FS is 0.0 and 100%FS is  
800.0.  
Variable parameter settings “P A R A”  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
0
1
L O C  
Key lock  
0: Key lock disabled  
1: Display of setup data settings disabled  
2: Display of parameter settings and program settings  
disabled  
3: Use of operation keys disabled  
4: Display of parameter settings and program settings  
displayed, and use of operation keys disabled  
[Note]  
Two or more key lock setting values for actual key lock  
PARA  
items and items assigned to  
and set.  
can be displayed  
0
0: Changing program settings enabled  
1: Changing program settings disabled  
0.0 to 120.0s  
Program protect  
2
3
P R T C  
F L  
Input 1 digital filter  
0.0  
[Note]  
0.0 disables the filter.  
-1000 to 1000U  
0U  
0U  
0.0  
Input 1 bias  
SP1 bias  
4
5
6
P B 1  
S B 1  
O T L  
-1999 to 9999U  
0.0 to 10.0% (0.1%s steps)  
[Note]  
MV change limitter  
(CH1)  
0.0 disables the limit.  
PID operation initial  
MV (CH1)  
0.0 to 100%  
[Note]  
7
8
1 O U T  
R P 1 D  
0.0  
(50.0)  
On heat/cool models, the factory setting is 50.0.  
0: Automatic judgment of initialization is carried out by  
advance operation.  
PID operation  
initialization  
0
1: Initialization is carried out by advance operation.  
2: Initialization is not carried out by advance operation.  
0: AT is disabled.  
Auto-tuning method  
selection (CH1)  
9
A T  
0
1: General AT is executed.  
2: Overshoot-inhibited AT is executed.  
3: AT by neural net is executed.  
[Note]  
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed, and  
setting is not possible.  
Smart-tuning  
10 S T  
0: Smart-tuning is disabled.  
0
0
method selection  
1: The brake value is fixed to inhibit overshoot.  
2: Overshoot is inhibited while automatically reviewing  
the brake value.  
(CH1)  
[Note]  
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed, and  
setting is not possible.  
0: 2 degrees of freedom PID is disabled.  
1: 2 degrees of freedom PID is enabled.  
[Note]  
11 2 P 1 D  
Advanced PID  
selection (CH1)  
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed, and  
setting is not possible.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
12 G 5 .T  
13 C P . 1 1  
2.0  
0U  
0.1 to 60.0s  
-1999 to 9999U  
[Note]  
G.Soak time (CH1)  
PID auto-switching  
point 1-1  
14 C P . 1 2  
15 C P . 1 3  
16 C P . 1 4  
17 C P . 1 5  
18 C P . 1 6  
19 C P . 1 7  
20 F A S T  
200U  
400U  
600U  
800U  
1000U  
1200U  
0
When setup data C 1 1 setting is 0 (PID set auto-  
switching OFF), “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not  
possible.  
PID auto-switching  
point 1-2  
PID auto-switching  
point 1-3  
PID auto-switching  
point 1-4  
-1999 to 9999U  
[Note]  
PID auto-switching  
point 1-5  
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed and setting  
is not possible.  
PID auto-switching  
point 1-6  
On other models, when setup data C 1 1 setting is 0  
(PID set auto-switching OFF), “– – – –” is displayed  
and setting is not possible.  
PID auto-switching  
point 1-7  
FAST factor  
0: 2X  
1: 10X  
2: 60X (10X)  
3: 120X (10X)  
[Note]  
When setup data C 6 4 setting is 1 (program time  
unit:min/s), the FAST factor is 10X for settings 2 and 3.  
21 D 1 F F  
ON-OFF control  
differential  
5U  
5.0  
0.0  
0 to 1000U  
[Note]  
This setting is displayed on 0D and 6D models.  
Position-propor-  
tional dead zone  
0.5 to 25.0%  
[Note]  
This setting is displayed on 2G output models.  
Heat/cool control  
dead zone  
-100.0 to 50.0%  
[Note]  
This setting is displayed on heat/cool models.  
[Note]  
On 5G output models, “– – – –” is displayed and  
setting is not possible.  
Output 1 time-  
proportional output  
cycle  
5 to 120s (relay output)  
22 C Y . 1  
10  
10  
1 to 60s (voltage output)  
[Note]  
On models whose output 1 is neither relay output nor  
voltage output, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not  
possible.  
Output 2 time-  
proportional output  
cycle  
5 to 120s (relay output)  
23 C Y . 2  
1 to 60s (voltage output)  
[Note]  
On models whose output 2 is neither relay output nor  
voltage output, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not  
possible.  
Unused  
[Note]  
24 C Y . 3  
25 D V -L  
26 D V -H  
27 H Y -L  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
0 to 1000U  
3-position control  
deviation lower limit  
3-position control  
deviation upper limit  
3-position control  
lower limit hyster-  
esis  
5U  
5U  
5U  
[Note]  
On models other than 3D output models, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
3-position control  
upper limit hyster-  
esis  
28 H Y -H  
5U  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
29 M .-C  
0
0: MFB control (conventional) + estimated position  
control  
Motor control  
method selection  
1: MFB control (conventional) only  
2: Estimated position control only  
[Note]  
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
0: Adjustment disabled  
30 M .-A T  
0
Motor valve opening  
automatic adjust-  
ment  
1: Adjustment enabled  
[Note]  
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
On 2G output models, when M .-C setting is 2, “– – – –  
” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
0 to (fully open adjustment - 500)  
[Note]  
31 M .-C L  
32 M .-O P  
33 M .-T  
Motor valve opening 1000  
adjustment fully  
closed position  
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
On 2G output models, when M .-C setting is 2, “– – – –  
” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
(fully closed adjustment + 500) to 9999  
[Note]  
Motor valve opening  
adjustment fully  
open position  
9000  
30.0  
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
On 2G output models, when M .-C setting is 2, “– – – –  
” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
5.0 to 240.0s  
Motor valve opening  
adjustment fully  
[Note]  
open/closed time  
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Description of variable parameter settings  
L O C (key lock)  
0: Key lock disabled  
1: Display of setup data settings disabled  
2: Display of parameter settings and program settings disabled  
3: Use of operation keys disabled  
4: Display of parameter settings and program settings displayed, and use of operation  
keys disabled  
• When L O C is set to 1, the following keys are disabled.  
FUNC  
CLR  
DISP  
Basic display state:  
+
+
(general reset)  
Only S E T can be selected by setting group selection in the parameter setup state.  
• When L O C is set to 2, the following keys are disabled.  
FUNC  
PROG  
Basic display state:  
+
+
+
(program setup)  
(program copy)  
(general reset)  
PROG  
CLR  
FUNC  
DISP  
+
Only P A R A can be selected by setting group selection in the parameter setup state.  
PARA  
PARA  
However, note that items assigned to  
play state.  
can be called up by  
in the basic dis-  
• When L O C is set to 3, the following keys are disabled.  
PROG  
Basic display state:  
(program selection)  
(program selection)  
RUN/HOLD  
PROG  
(RUN, HOLD)  
(RESET)  
RUN/HOLD  
DISP  
+
+
+
PROG  
FUNC  
(ADV)  
(FAST)  
A/M  
AT  
(AUTO, MANUAL)  
(AT start, AT cancel)  
(general reset)  
FUNC  
CLR  
DISP  
+
+
However, note that MV (when controller functions are selected) and SP (when pro-  
grammer functions are selected) can be changed in the basic display state in the  
MANUAL mode.  
• When L O C is set to 4, all keys disabled when L O C is set to 2 and 3 are disabled.  
P R T C (program protect)  
0: Changing program settings enabled  
1: Changing program settings disabled  
When P R T C is set to 1, the following keys are disabled.  
PROG  
Basic display state:  
+
+
(program copy)  
FUNC  
ENT  
CLR  
ENT  
DISP  
+
(general reset)  
Program setup state:  
(start of value entry)  
(segment insert/delete)  
FUNC  
+
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
O T L (MV change limit)  
The MV is increased or decreased by the same value so that the output change is taken as  
the limit setting value when the output change (%) after PID operation is greater than this  
limit setting.  
The following example shows the actual change in MV when the MV changes from 20%  
to 22% with the change limit setting at 0.5%. MV is output at 0.5% setting value incre-  
ments every 0.1s, and reaches 22% in 0.4s.  
%
22  
21  
20  
s
t
t + 0.1 t + 0.2 t + 0.3 t + 0.4  
I O U t (PID operation initial MV)  
PID operation is started in the following cases using the I O U t setting value:  
• When the mode changes from READY AUTO to RUN AUTO  
• When the power is turned ON in the RUN AUTO (or HOLD, FAST, END AUTO)  
mode  
• At completion of auto-tuning  
As the PV, SP and PID parameters settings bear a relation to PID operation, the first MV  
resulting from PID operation will not necessarily match the I O U t setting value.  
R P I D (PID operation initialization)  
When SP changes suddenly by ADV (advance) operation, rate action in PID operation  
may cause the MV in the operation to change excessively. For this reason, excessive  
changes can be suppressed by initializing PID operation.  
However, as initialization of PID operation may result in lost continuity, initialization  
may adversely influence PID operation depending on the circumstances in which the  
controller is being used.  
Initialization ON/OFF and conditions can be selected by the R P I D setting.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
S t (smart-tuning method selection)  
0: Smart-tuning is disabled.  
1: The brake value is fixed to inhibit overshoot.  
2: Overshoot is inhibited while automatically reviewing the brake value.  
• When the control direction is set to reverse action, overshoot is inhibited. When set to  
direct action, undershoot is inhibited. Both functions are referred to collectively as  
“overshoot inhibit.”  
When set to 1, the value of PID parameter setting item B R is used as it is to inhibit  
overshoot.  
When set to 2, the value of B R is reviewed at each rise (reverse action) or fall (direct  
action, and overshoot is inhibited while the value is automatically rewritten.  
Review is executed only in the direction in which the B R value is increased (overshoot  
inhibit effect becomes more apparent).  
When operation is carried out for a long time with this parameter set to 2, overshoot  
inhibit may function too strongly, and it may take a long time to arrive at SP. So, when  
overshoot disappears, note down the B R value at that time, set S T to 1, and reset the  
B R value to the noted down value.  
• The AT LED lights while reviewing the B R value when set to 2.  
• Do not set to 2 when normal control is not being carried out due to inappropriate tuning  
of the PID constant, for example.  
Also, hunting is more likely to occur when B R is set to a large value on quick-starting  
lines. Set the B R value to 0 then to 2.  
• On heat/cool models, smart-tuning does not function.  
2 P I D (2 degrees of freedom)  
0: 2 degrees of freedom is disabled.  
1: 2 degrees of freedom is enabled.  
• 2 degrees of freedom is a function for improving the response to disturbance during  
setup without losing conventional characteristics at rise (or fall).  
When set to 1, optimum PID constants can be set individually for inhibiting distur-  
bance in addition to conventional the PID constant.  
These constants are set automatically during AT execution, and is memorized. They  
can also be set and changed independently.  
In particular, on 2G output models, suppressing changes in MV to lessen the frequency  
of motor operation during setup, and manually applying weak PID differential for in-  
hibiting disturbance to lengthen service life, for example, proves effective.  
• These PID are switched automatically by applying fuzzy rules on the slope between  
deviation and PV.  
• When I (reset time) is set to 0, control is carried out without integration in all states  
regardless of the setting value of D I (disturbance inhibit reset time).  
• On heat/cool models, 2 degrees of freedom does not function.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
D I F F  
• ON-OFF control differential  
When P is set to 0.0 on both 0D and 6D output models, control is set to ON-OFF control,  
and operational period at that time is set.  
Reverse action  
Direct action  
ON  
OFF  
PV  
ON  
OFF  
PV  
Differential  
gap  
Differential  
gap  
SP  
SP  
• Position-proportional control dead zone  
On 2G output models, a dead zone between the motor open and motor closed positions is  
set.  
As a general guideline, the minimum value is the value where this dead zone changes to  
stop motor hunting once a fixed value set to manual output is being output.  
If this value is set without any margin, the motor will be operating at all times, which will  
considerably shorten its service life.  
The factory setting is 5%. Use this as a guideline, and take the control results and motor  
service life into consideration when setting the dead zone.  
*: Dead zone setting value  
Dead zone  
Closed-side  
relay ON  
Open-side  
relay ON  
Control output (%)  
*
*
MFB (%)  
• Heat/cool control dead zone  
On heat/cool models, this sets how the relationship between heat-side output and cool-  
side output should be processed with respect to the MV resulting from PID operation.  
Heat-cool control is calculated as follows:  
Note 4)  
PID set selection  
(1 of 4 sets)  
Heat-side  
PID set  
Cool-side  
PID set  
Note 3)  
Note 2)  
Heat-side PID set  
Constants OL, OH  
Cool-side PID set  
Constants OL, OH  
Constants P, I, D, Re  
PV  
SP  
Heat-side  
output  
PID operation  
(fixed to reverse action)  
Heat-cool output calculation  
MV  
(PID operation result)  
Cool-side  
output  
Note 1)  
Dead zone  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Note 1) On heat/cool models, this sets how the relationship between heat-side output  
and cool-side output should be processed with respect to the MV resulting from  
PID operation.  
Dead zone<0  
Dead zone=0  
100%  
100%  
Dead  
zone  
Control output  
values  
Output  
(cool)  
Output  
(heat)  
Output  
(cool)  
Output  
(heat)  
0%  
0%  
MV  
MV  
50%  
100%  
50%  
100%  
Dead zone>0  
100%  
Dead  
zone  
Output  
(cool)  
Output  
(heat)  
0%  
MV  
50%  
100%  
Note 2) Constants OL and OH function as follows:  
100%  
Cool-side  
output  
Heat-side  
output  
Cool-side OH  
Heat-side OH  
Cool-side OL  
MV  
Heat-side OL  
0%  
50%  
100%  
Note 3) When MV 50%, the heat-side PID set is switched to.  
When MV < 50%, the cool-side PID set is switched to.  
Note 4) PID set selection is carried out by setting value and external switch.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
D v -L (3-position control deviation lower limit)  
D v -H (3-position control deviation upper limit)  
H Y -L (3-position control lower limit hysteresis)  
H Y -H (3-position control upper limit hysteresis)  
In 3-position control, control is carried out in the following three states in the RUN,  
HOLD, FAST and END modes.  
State  
Heat-side Output Cool-side Output  
MV  
1
2
3
OFF (0.0%)  
OFF (0.0%)  
ON (100.0%)  
ON (100.0%)  
OFF (0.0%)  
OFF (0.0%)  
0.0%  
50.0%  
100.0%  
Output (heat)  
Output (cool)  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
PV  
HY-L  
DV-L  
DV-H  
HY-H  
SP  
Handling Precautions  
Even in 3-position control, output is time-proportional in the READY mode. This  
is set in setup data C 1 6 (MV (heat) in READY mode) and C 1 7 (MV (cool) in  
READY mode).  
When connecting an actuator that may burn by time-proportional output, set setup  
data C 1 6 and C 1 7 so that output in the READY mode is 0%.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
M .-C (motor control method selection)  
0: MFB control (conventional) + estimated position control  
1: MFB control (conventional) only  
2: Estimated position control only  
• 0: MFB control (conventional) + estimated position control  
• When MFB (Motor Feed Back) input is normal, the motor position is controlled by the  
actually measured MFB.  
• When MFB input is in error, the motor position is controlled by an estimated MFB  
value. This state is referred to as “estimated position control state.”  
For example, when the motor rotates at a position where the feedback potentiometer  
has deteriorated, MFB input changes suddenly. This sudden change is detected as an  
error, and the correct MFB position is estimated. The motor position is also controlled  
by the estimated MFB value when the MFB disconnected alarm has occurred.  
• In the estimated position control state, an error will inevitably occur between the actual  
motor valve opening and estimated MFB value.  
So, set the closed-side relay to ON at all times when output (MV) 0.0%, and the  
open-side relay to ON at all times when MV 100.0% to set the motor to a fully-open  
or fully-closed state to compensate this error.  
However, note that this error is not compensated when MV is limited to within 0.1 to  
99.9% by the output limitter, or when MV is 0.0% or less or 100% or more due to the  
control state.  
• The following are probable causes when estimated position control is likely to be car-  
ried out:  
- Defective motor valve opening adjustment  
- Deteriorated feedback potentiometer, insufficient resolution  
- Defective MFB wiring.  
• 1: MFB control (conventional) only  
• When this setting is used, conventional MFB control is carried out. When the MFB  
disconnected alarm occurs, the MFB value is regarded as 150.0%, and the closed-side  
relay is ON at all times.  
• 2: Estimated position control only  
• When this setting is used, control is in the estimated position control state at all times,  
and the motor position is controlled by the estimated MFB value regardless of the state  
of MFB wiring.  
• When this setting is used, enter the correct M .-t item.  
• The MFB disconnected alarm does not occur.  
• The error between actual motor valve opening and estimated MFB value is compen-  
sated by forcibly continuing motor operation in the closed or open directions when MV  
is 0.0% and 100%.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
M .-A t (motor valve opening automatic adjustment)  
0: Adjustment disabled  
1: Adjustment enabled  
This parameter automatically measures the motor fully closed position, fully open posi-  
tion, and close-open times. The results of calculation are automatically written to M .-C L,  
M .-O P and M .-t.  
• Adjustment Method and Motor Functions  
1. Set M .-C to 0 or 1.  
ENT  
2. Set M .-A t to 1, and press  
.
ENT  
If set to 1 already, press  
twice to enter automatic adjustment.  
3. Automatic adjustment is carried out.  
- C A .C L is displayed on the upper display, and the closed-side relay turns ON.  
- The motor operates to the closed side, and the MFB count value is displayed on  
the lower display. When the count has stabilized, fully closed adjustment is com-  
pleted, and the count value is written to M .-C L.  
- C A .O P is displayed on the upper display, and the closed-side relay turns ON.  
- The motor operates to the open side, and the MFB count value is displayed on the  
lower display. When the count has stabilized, fully open adjustment is completed,  
and the count value is written to M .-O P.  
The time it took from fully closed to fully open is written to M .-t. However, note  
that if this time is 240.0s or more, the time is taken as 240.0s.  
- When all adjustments are completed, the controller returns to the basic display  
state.  
DISP  
4. To cancel automatic adjustment, press  
.
DISP  
When automatic adjustment begins, you cannot press any keys other than  
.
DISP  
is used for canceling adjustment.  
The following instances are regarded as errors. In these instances, the factory set-  
tings are returned to, and A L 1 2 is displayed. The A L 1 2 display can be cleared  
only when automatic re-adjustment has ended successfully or when the power has  
been reset.  
- Fully closed count - fully open count < 500  
- Fully closed count > fully open count  
- Time from fully closed to fully open is less than 5s  
- MFB disconnected alarm (A L 1 0, A L 1 1) occurs continuously or frequently  
- The time taken for the MFB count to stabilize exceeds 5min  
- Faulty wiring of MFB or switching relay  
(However, note that all faulty wiring cannot be detected as an error.)  
M .-t (motor valve opening adjustment fully open/closed time)  
When M .-C is set to 2, the set time is taken as the base for all operations. Enter the time  
correctly in 0.1s units.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Event configuration data settings E v”  
No. Item Code  
1
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
E T 1  
0
PV type events  
0: PV direct  
Event 1 type  
1: PV reverse  
2: Deviation direct  
3: Deviation reverse  
4: Absolute value deviation1 direct  
5: Absolute value deviation1 reverse  
6: SP direct  
7: SP reverse  
8: MV direct  
9: MV reverse  
10: MFB direct  
11: MFB reverse  
12 to 49: NOP  
Time events  
50: Time event  
51 to 99: NOP  
Controller status events  
100: RUN+HOLD+FAST+END  
101: READY  
102: RUN  
103: HOLD  
104: FAST  
105: END  
106: G.Soak standby  
107: MANUAL  
108: Auto-tuning executing  
109: Constant-value operation  
110: MFB estimated position control  
111: Sum of all alarms  
112: PV range alarm  
113: Controller alarm  
114: Low battery voltage  
115: Console setup in progress  
116: Loader setup in progress  
117: ADV (ON time 1s)  
118 to 199: NOP  
[Note]  
Setting can be changed only in READY mode.  
0: Standby OFF  
2
E D 1  
0
Event 1 standby  
1: Standby ON  
[Note]  
The controller stands by after power is restored and in  
the READY mode. When the event type setting is 50,  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
0 to 200U (when event type is neither MV nor MFB)  
0.0 to 20.0% (when event type is MV or MFB)  
[Note]  
3
4
H Y S 1  
5
0
Event 1 hysteresis  
When the event type setting is 50, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
0 to 3600s  
D L 1  
Event 1 ON delay  
time  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
5
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
E T 2  
0
PV type events  
0: PV direct  
Event 2 type  
1: PV reverse  
2: Deviation direct  
3: Deviation reverse  
4: Absolute value deviation1 direct  
5: Absolute value deviation1 reverse  
6: SP direct  
7: SP reverse  
8: MV direct  
9: MV reverse  
10: MFB direct  
11: MFB reverse  
12 to 49: NOP  
Time events  
50: Time event  
51 to 99: NOP  
Controller status events  
100: RUN+HOLD+FAST+END  
101: READY  
102: RUN  
103: HOLD  
104: FAST  
105: END  
106: G.Soak standby  
107: MANUAL  
108: Auto-tuning executing  
109: Constant-value operation  
110: MFB estimated position control  
111: Sum of all alarms  
112: PV range alarm  
113: Controller alarm  
114: Low battery voltage  
115: Console setup in progress  
116: Loader setup in progress  
117: ADV (ON time 1s)  
118 to 199: NOP  
[Note]  
Setting can be changed only in READY mode.  
6
E D 2  
0
Event 2 standby  
0: Standby OFF  
1: Standby ON  
[Note]  
The controller stands by after power is restored and in  
the READY mode. When the event type setting is 50,  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
7
8
H Y S 2  
5
0
0 to 200U (when event type is neither MV nor MFB)  
0.0 to 20.0% (when event type is MV or MFB)  
[Note]  
Event 2 hysteresis  
When the event type setting is 50, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
D L 2  
0 to 3600s  
Event 2 ON delay  
time  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
9
E T 3  
0
PV type events  
0: PV direct  
Event 3 type  
1: PV reverse  
2: Deviation direct  
3: Deviation reverse  
4: Absolute value deviation1 direct  
5: Absolute value deviation1 reverse  
6: SP direct  
7: SP reverse  
8: MV direct  
9: MV reverse  
10: MFB direct  
11: MFB reverse  
12 to 49: NOP  
Time events  
50: Time event  
51 to 99: NOP  
Controller status events  
100: RUN+HOLD+FAST+END  
101: READY  
102: RUN  
103: HOLD  
104: FAST  
105: END  
106: G.Soak standby  
107: MANUAL  
108: Auto-tuning executing  
109: Constant-value operation  
110: MFB estimated position control  
111: Sum of all alarms  
112: PV range alarm  
113: Controller alarm  
114: Low battery voltage  
115: Console setup in progress  
116: Loader setup in progress  
117: ADV (ON time 1s)  
118 to 199: NOP  
[Note]  
Setting can be changed only in READY mode.  
10 E D 3  
0
Event 3 standby  
0: Standby OFF  
1: Standby ON  
[Note]  
The controller stands by after power is restored and in  
the READY mode. When the event type setting is 50,  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
11 H Y S 3  
5
0
Event 3 hysteresis  
0 to 200U (when event type is neither MV nor MFB)  
0.0 to 20.0% (when event type is MV or MFB)  
[Note]  
When the event type setting is 50, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
12 D L 3  
Event 3 ON delay  
time  
0 to 3600s  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
0: T1 to T5 are all time events.  
13 T T  
0
Time event type  
1: T1 is a segment No. event.  
T2 to T5 are time events.  
2: T1 and T2 are segment No. events.  
T3 to T5 are time events.  
3: T1 to T3 are segment No. events.  
T4 and T5 are time events.  
4: T1 to T4 are segment No. events.  
T5 is a time event.  
5: All T1 to T5 are segment No. events.  
[Note]  
On models not supporting time events, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
Settings can be changed only in the READY mode.  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Description of event configuration data  
E D 1 (event 1 standby)  
E D 2 (event 2 standby)  
E D 3 (event 3 standby)  
0: Standby OFF  
1: Standby ON  
• When set to standby ON, event output becomes OFF if the controller is in the standby  
state even if the condition for turning event output ON is satisfied.  
• The controller enters the standby state in the following instances:  
- When in the READY mode  
- When shifting from the READY to the RUN mode  
- When the power is turned ON  
• The standby state is canceled in the following instances:  
- When the condition for turning event output OFF (not including the hysteresis pe-  
riod) is satisfied in one of the RUN, HOLD or FAST modes  
- When set to standby OFF  
• In the following example, PV event direct, operating point 500°C, hysteresis 10°C and  
standby ON are set. When the mode changes from READY to the RUN mode at PV  
550°C, the controller enters the standby state, so event output is turned OFF.  
• Standby functions only when the event type is set to PV type event, and does not  
function when set to time event type or controller status type.  
D L 1 (event 1 ON delay time)  
D L 2 (event 2 ON delay time)  
D L 3 (event 3 ON delay time)  
• The ON delay time is processed after completing all processes up to event output standby  
ON/OFF. Event output is turned ON when more than the ON delay time has elapsed  
with the condition for turning event output ON satisfied.  
• When the event type is set to ADV, the ON delay function does not operate whatever  
value is set as the ON delay time.  
• ON delay time is processed as follows.  
Event OFF conditions  
Event output OFF  
Event OFF conditions  
Event ON conditions  
Event output ON  
Event output OFF  
Time  
ON delay time  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
PID parameter settings P I d”  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
: 0.0 to 999.9% (0D, 6D output models)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P -1  
100.0  
P
Proportional band  
(PID set 1)  
0.0 enables ON-OFF control.  
0.1 to 999.9% (models other than 0D and 6D output  
models)  
1 -1  
0
Reset time  
(PID set 1)  
D -1  
0
I
: 0 to 3600s  
Rate time  
0 disables integrating action.  
: 0 to 1200s  
(PID set 1)  
O L -1  
O H -1  
R E -1  
D R -1  
D P -1  
0.0  
100.0  
50.0  
0
D
MV lower limit  
(PID set 1)  
0 disables derivative action.  
O L : -10.0 to MV upper limit %  
O H : MV lower limit to 110.0%  
R E : 0.0 to 100.0%  
MV upper limit  
(PID set 1)  
Manual reset  
(PID set 1)  
B R : 0 to 30  
0 disables the brake function.  
D P : 0.1 to 999.9%  
Brake  
(PID set 1)  
100.0  
D 1 : 1 to 3600s  
Disturbance inhibit  
proportional band  
(PID set 1)  
D D : 0 to 1200  
0 disables derivative action.  
9
D 1 -1  
Disturbance inhibit  
reset time  
120  
0
[Note]  
(PID set 1)  
• On 0D and 6D output models, when P setting is 0.0,  
ON-OFF control is enabled. “– – – –” is displayed for  
items I, D, O L, O H, R E, D P, D I and D D, and  
setting is not possible.  
10 D D -1  
Disturbance inhibit  
rate time  
(PID set 1)  
11 P -2  
Proportional band  
(PID set 2)  
100.0  
0
• When variable parameter M . -C setting is 2 (estimated  
position control only) on 2G output models,  
“– – – ” is displayed for items O L and O H, and  
setting is not possible.  
12 1 -2  
Reset time  
(PID set 2)  
13 D -2  
Rate time  
0
• When I setting is not 0, “– – – –” is displayed for R E  
(PID set 2)  
and setting is not possible.  
14 O L -2  
15 O H -2  
16 R E -2  
17 B R -2  
18 D P -2  
MV lower limit  
(PID set 2)  
0.0  
• When variable parameter S T setting is 0 (smart-tuning  
disabled), “– – – –” is displayed for B R and setting is  
not possible.  
MV upper limit  
(PID set 2)  
100.0  
50.0  
0
• When variable parameter 2 P 1 D setting is 0 (2  
Manual reset  
(PID set 2)  
degrees of freedom PID disabled), the items for  
Brake  
D P, D 1, D D are not displayed.  
(PID set 2)  
• On heat/cool models, the set No. of the PID parameter  
used for the PID set No. is as follows:  
Disturbance inhibit  
proportional band  
(PID set 2)  
100.0  
PID Set No. Designated in the  
PID Set PID Set  
19 D I -2  
Disturbance inhibit  
reset time  
120  
0
Program or Zone No. According  
(heat) (cool)  
to Automatic Selection of PID Set  
(PID set 2)  
1
2
3
4
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
Disturbance inhibit  
rate time  
20 D D -2  
(PID set 2)  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
Proportional band  
(PID set 3)  
21 P -3  
100.0  
• When variable parameter 2 P 1 D setting is 1 (2  
degrees of freedom PID enabled), the parameter (P, 1,  
D) ideal for control when SP changes and the param-  
eter (D P, D 1, D D) ideal for inhibiting disturbance  
during settling are automatically switched.  
Reset time  
22 1 -3  
0
(PID set 3)  
Rate time  
23 D -3  
0
(PID set 3)  
MV lower limit  
(PID set 3)  
• Decreasing the proportional band (P, D P) value  
improves controllability. However, it also makes  
overshoot or hunting more likely to occur.  
24 O L -3  
25 O H -3  
26 R E -3  
27 B R -3  
28 D P -3  
0.0  
100.0  
50.0  
0
MV upper limit  
(PID set 3)  
Use of the controller on a motor or actuator shortens  
the controller’s life. Do not set the proportional band  
(P, D P) to too small a value.  
Manual reset  
(PID set 3)  
Brake  
(PID set 3)  
• Decreasing the reset time (1, D 1) improves trackability.  
However, it also makes cycling caused by integrating  
action more likely to occur.  
Disturbance inhibit  
proportional band  
(PID set 3)  
100.0  
When 1 setting is 0, integrating operation for inhibiting  
disturbance also functions.  
Disturbance inhibit  
reset time  
29 D I -3  
120  
0
(PID set 3)  
• Increasing the rate time (D, D D) allows overshoot to  
be inhibited more easily. However, it also make  
hunting more likely to occur as the controller reacts to  
minute changes in PV.  
Disturbance inhibit  
rate time  
30 D D -3  
(PID set 3)  
Proportional band  
(PID set 4)  
31 P -4  
100.0  
0
In a temperature control system, setting the rate time  
to /3 to 1/4 of the integrating time is generally consid-  
1
Reset time  
32 1 -4  
ered to be appropriate. In a pressure or flow rate  
control system, derivative action causes hunting.  
Either set the D setting to 0.0 to disable derivative  
action, or decrease the setting so that derivative action  
is almost negligible. The latter solution is more  
frequently adopted.  
(PID set 4)  
Rate time  
33 D -4  
0
(PID set 4)  
MV lower limit  
(PID set 4)  
34 O L -4  
35 O H -4  
36 R E -4  
37 B R -4  
38 D P -4  
0.0  
MV upper limit  
(PID set 4)  
100.0  
50.0  
0
• The MV upper and lower limits (O L, O H) function as  
integrating limits. When the MV reaches the upper or  
lower limit, integration no longer functions. This  
prevents reset wind-up that occurs when the PV has  
not risen for a long time.  
Manual reset  
(PID set 4)  
Brake  
(PID set 4)  
Disturbance inhibit  
proportional band  
(PID set 4)  
100.0  
• Manual reset (R E) is a setting for eliminating offset  
that occurs during proportional action (integrated  
action disabled). For manual reset, set the MV ideal for  
deviation 0.  
Disturbance inhibit  
reset time  
39 D 1 -4  
120  
0
(PID set 4)  
Disturbance inhibit  
rate time  
40 D D -4  
• Increasing the brake (B R) value increases the  
overshoot inhibit effect. However, it also lengthens the  
rise time.  
(PID set 4)  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
41 P -5  
100.0  
Proportional band  
(PID set 5)  
42 1 -5  
0
Reset time  
(PID set 5)  
43 D -5  
0
Rate time  
(PID set 5)  
44 O L -5  
45 O H -5  
46 R E -5  
47 B R -5  
48 D P -5  
0.0  
100.0  
50.0  
0
MV lower limit  
(PID set 5)  
MV upper limit  
(PID set 5)  
Manual reset  
(PID set 5)  
Brake  
(PID set 5)  
100.0  
Disturbance inhibit  
proportional band  
(PID set 5)  
49 D 1 -5  
120  
0
Disturbance inhibit  
reset time  
(PID set 5)  
50 D D -5  
Disturbance inhibit  
rate time  
(PID set 5)  
51 P -6  
Proportional band  
(PID set 6)  
100.0  
0
52 1 -6  
Reset time  
(PID set 6)  
53 D -6  
Rate time  
0
(PID set 6)  
54 O L -6  
55 O H -6  
56 R E -6  
57 B R -6  
58 D P -6  
MV lower limit  
(PID set 6)  
0.0  
MV upper limit  
(PID set 6)  
100.0  
50.0  
0
Manual reset  
(PID set 6)  
Brake  
(PID set 6)  
Disturbance inhibit  
proportional band  
(PID set 6)  
100.0  
59 D 1 -6  
Disturbance inhibit  
reset time  
120  
0
(PID set 6)  
60 D D -6  
Disturbance inhibit  
rate time  
(PID set 6)  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
61 P -7  
100.0  
Proportional band  
(PID set 7)  
62 1 -7  
0
Reset time  
(PID set 7)  
63 D -7  
0
Rate time  
(PID set 7)  
64 O L -7  
65 O H -7  
66 R E -7  
67 B R -7  
68 D P -7  
0.0  
100.0  
50.0  
0
MV lower limit  
(PID set 7)  
MV upper limit  
(PID set 7)  
Manual reset  
(PID set 7)  
Brake  
(PID set 7)  
100.0  
Disturbance inhibit  
proportional band  
(PID set 7)  
69 D 1 -7  
120  
0
Disturbance inhibit  
reset time  
(PID set 7)  
70 D D -7  
Disturbance inhibit  
rate time  
(PID set 7)  
71 P -8  
Proportional band  
(PID set 8)  
100.0  
0
72 1 -8  
Reset time  
(PID set 8)  
73 D -8  
Rate time  
0
(PID set 8)  
74 O L -8  
75 O H -8  
76 R E -8  
77 B R -8  
78 D P -8  
MV lower limit  
(PID set 8)  
0.0  
MV upper limit  
(PID set 8)  
100.0  
50.0  
0
Manual reset  
(PID set 8)  
Brake  
(PID set 8)  
Disturbance inhibit  
proportional band  
(PID set 8)  
100.0  
79 D 1 -8  
Disturbance inhibit  
reset time  
120  
0
(PID set 8)  
80 D D -8  
Disturbance inhibit  
rate time  
(PID set 8)  
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Setup data settings S E t”  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
1
C 0 1  
0
Control action (CH1)  
0: Reverse action (heat)  
1: Direct action (cool)  
[Note]  
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed and setting  
is not possible.  
On other models, external switch input can invert  
direct/reverse action on the setting of C 0 1.  
0: °C  
1: °F  
[Note]  
2
3
C 0 2  
0
0
Input 1 temperature  
unit  
When the input 1 range type is linear, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
0 to 73  
C 0 3  
Input 1 range type  
0 to 20: Thermocouple  
32 to 40, 48 to 56: Resistance temperature detector  
64 to 73: Linear (dc current, dc voltage)  
[Note]  
Refer to the input 1 range table. Operation according  
to a setting not listed in this table is not fixed.  
0 to 3  
4
C 0 4  
Input 1 range  
decimal point  
position  
Not fixed  
[Note]  
When the input 1 range type is non-linear, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
When the input 1 range type is changed from non-  
linear to linear, the original non-linear range values  
remain.  
5
6
C 0 5  
C 0 6  
Input 1 range lower Not fixed  
limit (0%)  
-1999 to 9999U  
[Note]  
When the input 1 range type is non-linear, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
When the input 1 range type is changed from non-  
linear to linear, the original non-linear range values  
remain.  
Input 1 range upper Not fixed  
limit (100%)  
The relationship between the analog inputs and  
readout values can be inverted by inverting the upper  
and lower limit values.  
Input 1 root extrac-  
tion dropout  
0.0 to 10.0% (ratio to input range)  
[Note]  
7
8
9
C 0 7  
C 0 8  
C 0 q  
0.0  
0.0 disables square root extraction.  
When the input 1 range type is non-linear, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
0: Disabled  
Input 1 linearization  
table approximation  
0
1: Enabled  
[Note]  
Table data setting (a, b) is used for the linearization  
table.  
-1999 to upper limit U  
SP1 lower limit  
SP1 upper limit  
0%FS  
100%FS  
[Note]  
Changing the input 1 range has no effect on the range.  
However, note that a general reset sets the range to  
the 0%FS value of the input 1 range.  
Lower limit to 9999U  
10 C 1 0  
[Note]  
Changing the input 1 range has no effect on the range.  
However, note that a general reset sets the range to  
the 0%FS value of the input 1 range.  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
11 C 1 1  
0
PID set auto-  
0: OFF (PID set segment designation)  
switching (CH1)  
1: ON  
[Note]  
When set to 1, the PID set items in the program are  
invalid.  
The switching point for auto-switching is set in variable  
parameters (C P . 1 1 to C P . 1 7).  
12 C 1 2  
0
0
0: OFF  
MV setting at input 1  
over-range (MV1)  
MV at input 1 over-  
range (MV1)  
1: ON  
13 C 1 3  
-10 to 110%  
[Note]  
When C 1 2 setting is 0, “– – – –” is displayed and  
setting is not possible.  
0: Bump-less  
14 C 1 4  
Manual change  
mode (MV1)  
0
1: Preset  
[Note]  
When the programmer function is selected, operation  
is bump-less regardless of the setting of C 1 4.  
-10 to 110%  
15 C 1 5  
Preset manual value  
(MV1)  
0
0
[Note]  
When C 1 4 setting is 0, “– – – –” is displayed and  
setting is not possible.  
MV in READY mode  
(MV1, MV1 heat-  
cool output)  
-10 to 110%  
16 C 1 6  
[Note]  
This setting is invalid even if the programmer function  
is selected by C 1 8 setting.  
On heat/cool models, this setting functions as the MV  
(heat) setting in the READY mode.  
17  
18  
0
0
C 1 7  
-10 to 110%  
[Note]  
MV (cool) in READY  
mode (MV1 heat-  
cool output)  
When the model is not a heat/cool model, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
0: MV1 output (controller function)  
1: SP1 output (programmer function)  
[Note]  
Main output type  
(CH1)  
C 1 8  
When the model is not a 5G output model, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
-1999 to 9999U  
SP1 main output  
lower limit (4mA  
setting)  
19 C 1 q  
0U  
[Note]  
When the model is not a 5G output model and 8  
setting is 0 on a 5G output model, “– – – –” is dis-  
played and setting is not possible.  
The relationship between the analog outputs and SP1  
can be inverted by inverting the upper and lower limit  
values.  
SP1 main output  
upper limit (20mA  
setting)  
20 C 2 0  
1000U  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
21 C 2 1  
22 C 2 2  
23 C 2 3  
24 C 2 4  
25 C 2 5  
26 C 2 6  
27 C 2 7  
28 C 2 8  
29 C 2 q  
30 C 3 0  
[Note]  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
7-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
31 C 3 1  
32 C 3 2  
33 C 3 3  
34 C 3 4  
35 C 3 5  
36 C 3 6  
37 C 3 7  
38 C 3 8  
39 C 3 Q  
40 C 4 0  
41 C 4 1  
42 C 4 2  
43 C 4 3  
44 C 4 4  
45 C 4 5  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
[Note]  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
0
3-position control  
0: 3-position control disabled  
1: 3-position control enabled  
[Note]  
On models not supporting 3D output, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
0: PV1  
46 C 4 6  
0
Auxiliary output 1  
type  
1: SP1  
2: Deviation1  
3: MV1  
4 to 7: NOP  
8: MFB  
9 to 11: NOP  
[Note]  
On models not supporting auxiliary output 1, “– – – –”  
is displayed and setting is not possible.  
When set to NOP (or to MFB on models other than 2G  
output models), output is fixed to 4mA.  
When set to SP or deviation, output in the READY  
mode is fixed to 4mA.  
-1999 to 9999U  
47 C 4 7  
0
Auxiliary output 1  
lower limit (4mA)  
-199.9 to 999.9%  
[Note]  
When the auxiliary output type is MV or MFB, the unit is  
%. Otherwise, the unit is U.  
0: PV1  
48 C 4 8  
Auxiliary output 1  
upper limit (20mA)  
Auxiliary output 2  
type  
1000  
0
49 C 4 q  
1: SP1  
2: Deviation1  
3: MV1  
4 to 7: NOP  
8: MFB  
9 to 11: NOP  
[Note]  
When auxiliary output 2 is not supported, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
When set to NOP (or to MFB on models other than 2G  
output models), output is fixed to 4mA.  
When set to SP or deviation, output in the READY  
mode is fixed to 4mA.  
7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
-1999 to 9999U  
-199.9 to 999.9%  
[Note]  
50 C 5 0  
Auxiliary output 2  
lower limit (4mA)  
Auxiliary output 2  
lower limit (20mA)  
0
51 C 5 1  
1000  
When the auxiliary output type is MV or MFB, the unit is  
%. Otherwise, the unit is U.  
External switch  
input RSW5  
assignment  
52 C 5 2  
53 C 5 3  
54 C 5 4  
0
0
0
0: NOP  
1: Fast operation  
2: PV start  
External switch  
input RSW6  
assignment  
3: NOP  
4: AT start/stop  
5: NOP  
External switch  
input RSW7  
assignment  
6: Manual/auto operation  
7: Cancel G.Soak by OR conditions  
8: Cancel G.Soak by AND conditions  
9: Direct/reverse action inversion  
10 to 20: NOP  
[Note]  
On external switch 4-input models, “– – – –” is dis-  
played and setting is not displayed.  
When the same assignment is set to two or more RSWs,  
the RSW setting with the lowest No. is valid.  
When this setting is set to NOP, the controller state is  
not switched by external switch input ON/OFF. The  
controller state can be switched ON/OFF by communi-  
cations.  
PARA  
assignment  
1000 to 5000  
[Note]  
55 C 5 5  
56 C 5 6  
57 C 5 7  
58 C 5 8  
59 C 5 q  
60 C 6 0  
61 C 6 1  
62 C 6 2  
63 C 6 3  
64 C 6 4  
65 C 6 5  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
0
item 1  
PARA  
assignment  
To set the No., add the No. of the item to be assigned  
PARA  
item 2  
PARA  
to  
to the following values for the setting group  
assignment  
containing that item.  
item 3  
PARA  
• 1000: Constant-value operation data  
• 1500: PID parameter  
assignment  
item 4  
PARA  
• 2500: Variable parameter  
• 3500: Event configuration data  
• 4000: Table data  
assignment  
item 5  
PARA  
assignment  
• 4500: Setup data  
item 6  
PARA  
Assignments to which a nonexistent No. have been set  
are invalid.  
assignment  
item 7  
PARA  
assignment  
item 8  
Operation comple-  
tion state  
0: READY  
1: END  
Program time unit  
0: h/min  
0
1: min/s  
Time display  
PV display  
0: Remaining segment time  
0
1: Total operation time  
[Note]  
The total operation time returns to 0 in the READY mode.  
0: ON  
66 C 6 6  
0
1: OFF  
2: ON  
3: OFF  
[Note]  
Settings 0 and 2, and 1 and 3 mean the same, respec-  
tively.  
7-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
0: Display ON  
1: Display OFF  
[Note]  
67 C 6 7  
Alarm display  
Even when set to 1, alarm-related events do not  
operate.  
0: Display ON  
68 C 6 8  
69 C 6 q  
70 C 7 0  
71 C 7 1  
Programming item:  
Events 1 to 3  
0
0
0
0
1: Display OFF  
[Note]  
Programming item:  
Time events 1 to 5  
Programming item:  
PID set, G.Soak  
Programming item:  
PV start, cycle,  
Even if each of the items are set to 1, the function  
operates even if data is set to the program.  
On models not supporting time events, time event  
items are not displayed in program settings regardless  
of the number of C 6 q settings.  
pattern link  
0: Compensated internally  
Cold junction  
compensation  
72 C 7 2  
73 C 7 3  
74 C 7 4  
0
0
0
1: Compensated externally  
[Note]  
When the input 1 range type is other than a thermo-  
couple, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not  
possible.  
0: Upscale  
Input operation at  
input 1 disconnec-  
tion  
1: Downscale  
[Note]  
This setting is valid when the input 1 range type is  
thermocouple, resistance temperature detector or  
linear (mV series).  
0: Input ON again enabled within time-proportional cycle  
1: Input ON again disabled within time-proportional cycle  
[Note]  
Voltage time-  
proportional output  
system  
When both of outputs 1 and 2 are not voltage time-  
proportional outputs, “– – – –” is displayed and setting  
is not possible.  
0: Current output  
1: Voltage output  
[Note]  
Output 1 selection  
Output 2 selection  
75 C 7 5  
76 C 7 6  
Not fixed  
Not fixed  
When each of the outputs are relay output, position-  
proportional output, auxiliary output or output is not  
mounted, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not  
possible.  
Factory setting is 1 if outputs are voltage output  
according to output type. Otherwise, the setting is 0.  
Unused  
[Note]  
77 C 7 7  
78 C 7 8  
79 C 7 q  
15  
15  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
2 to 22mA  
[Note]  
When each of the outputs are other than voltage output,  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
Normally, use the factory setting.  
[Note]  
Voltage output 1  
adjustment  
Voltage output 2  
adjustment  
Unused  
80 C 8 0  
0
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
Input 1 burnout cur-  
rent (expansion set-  
ting 1)  
81 C 8 1  
0: Burnout current ON  
1: Burnout current OFF  
[Note]  
Normally set to 0.  
Set to 1 when infra-red thermocouple RT50 is connected  
to input 1.  
7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
82 C 8 2  
0
Expansion setting 2  
0: Expansion disabled  
1: Expansion enabled  
[Note]  
This setting is for service use only.  
[Note]  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
0 to 127  
[Note]  
On models not supporting communications, “– – – –” is  
83 C 8 3  
Unused  
0
84 C 8 4  
Station address  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
0 disables communication.  
85 C 8 5  
Transmission rate/  
character format  
0
0: 9600bps/even parity, 1 stop bit  
1: 9600bps/no parity, 2 stop bits  
2: 4800bps/even parity, 1 stop bit  
3: 4800bps/no parity, 2 stop bits  
[Note]  
On models not supporting communications, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
86 C 8 6  
87 C 8 7  
88 C 8 8  
89 C 8 q  
90 C q 0  
Unused  
0
[Note]  
Unused  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
Unused  
Unused  
Special functions  
[Note]  
Normally set to “0”.  
Input 1 zener barrier  
adjustment  
[Note]  
91  
0
C q 1  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
Unused  
92 C q 2  
93 C q 3  
94 C q 4  
95 C q 5  
[Note]  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
CPL communica-  
tions port selection  
PID type  
0:  
Add-on terminal  
1 to 15: Loader jack (communications address)  
0
0: Improved  
1: Compatible with DCP200  
[Note]  
Unused  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
96 C q 6  
97 C q 7  
98 C q 8  
99 C q q  
100 C 0 0  
[Note]  
Hardware type 1  
Hardware type 2  
ROM ID  
This setting is for service use only, and can only be  
verified.  
ROM item  
ROM revision  
7-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Description of setup data settings  
C 0 7 (input 1 square root extraction dropout)  
• Generally, the differential pressure detected by an orifice on a differential pressure  
type flowmeter, is proportional to the square of the flowrate. For this reason, square  
root extraction is carried out when uniform signals are required.  
When input for square root extraction is the dropout value set by C 0 7 or less, output  
from square root extraction processing can be set to 0%.  
• When C 0 7 is set to 1, square root extraction is not carried out.  
Output after square root  
extraction (Y)  
Y=(X/100)1/2 x 100  
100%  
Input (X)  
100%  
Dropout value  
(variable in range 0.1 to 10.0%)  
• Square root extraction is carried within the range 0.0 to 100.0%. In the ranges -10.0 to  
0.0% and 100.0 to 110.0%, regular scaling is carried out.  
C 0 q (SP1 lower limit)  
C 1 0 (SP1 upper limit)  
• This is a program setup pattern item, and functions as a limitter when setting or chang-  
ing SP.  
• In the program operation mode, this functions as a limitter on the value obtained by  
adding the SP set to the program to the SP bias (variable parameter). The result of this  
operation is taken as SP.  
• This functions as a limitter when setting or changing the SP in constant-value data  
setup.  
• In the constant-value operation mode, this functions as a limitter on the value obtained  
by adding the SP set to the constant-value operation data to the SP bias (variable pa-  
rameter). The result of this operation is taken as SP.  
C 4 7 (auxiliary output 1 lower limit)  
C 4 8 (auxiliary output 1 upper limit)  
C 5 0 (auxiliary output 2 lower limit)  
C 5 1 (auxiliary output 2 upper limit)  
• This is the scaling setting for auxiliary output. The values of the upper limit setting and  
lower limit setting can also be inverted.  
• In the following example, the type is set to MV at auxiliary input 1. 12mA is output  
when MV is 100% and 20mA is output when MV is 0%. In the following figure, MV is  
200% when virtually calculated at 4mA.  
Accordingly, the setting of C 4 7 and C 4 8 become 200.0 and 0.0, respectively.  
Auxiliary output 1  
20 mA  
12 mA  
4 mA  
MV  
100%  
200%  
7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
C 6 5 (time display)  
0: Remaining segment time  
1: Total operation time  
• This selects the time display in the basic display state in the program operation mode.  
• When set to 0, in the READY mode, the time setting value of the currently selected  
segment is displayed.  
• When set to 0, in the RUN, HOLD, FAST or END modes, the remaining time for the  
currently executing segment is displayed after being rounded down.  
For example, if the remaining time is 1h, 30min, 59s when the time unit is set to “h:min”,  
the time display is “1 .3 0”.  
• When set to 1, in the READY mode, the time display is “0 .0 0”.  
• When set to 1, in the RUN, HOLD, FAST or END modes, the time it takes to shift from  
the READY to the RUN mode is displayed after being round down. Also, after  
q q .5 q” the time display changes to “0 .0 0”.  
For example, if the remaining time is 101h, 30min, 59s when the total operation time is  
set to “h:min”, the time display is “1 .3 0”.  
• In the FAST mode, the time display changes according to the FAST scale if this pa-  
rameter is set to either 0 or 1.  
C 6 6 (PV display)  
This selects PV display in the basic display state. You can select between numerical  
display or no display at all. The setting of this parameter does not influence PV-related  
input processing, PID operation, event output, auxiliary output and alarm display.  
Also, to eliminate PV alarm display or PV alarm event output, select the thermocouple  
range by the input range to short-circuit the input terminals.  
C 7 2 (cold junction compensation)  
0: Compensated internally  
1: Compensated externally  
• This selects how thermocouple cold junctions are to be compensated.  
• When set to 1, carry out 0°C compensation by an ice box, for example.  
C 7 4 (voltage time-proportional output system)  
0: Input ON again enabled within time-proportional cycle  
1: Input ON again disabled within time-proportional cycle  
• This selects whether or not to turn output ON again even if output is OFF when the  
results of PID operation have changed during the time-proportional cycle (cycle time).  
• The figure below shows each of these differences.  
Setting=0  
Cycle time  
Cycle time  
ON  
OFF  
PID operation result  
Setting=1  
20%  
50%  
40%  
Cycle time  
Cycle time  
ON  
OFF  
PID operation result  
20%  
50%  
40%  
7-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
C 7 8 (voltage output 1 adjustment)  
C 7 q (voltage output 2 adjustment)  
When driving an SSR by voltage time-proportional output, the output voltage of the  
controller must be within the input rated voltage (optimum ignition voltage) of the SSR.  
On the DCP301, a newly developed variable output system is utilized that enables output  
of the optimum ignition voltage even when driving two or more SSRs.  
This system sets the optimum current value on the controller so that the optimum ignition  
voltage with respect to the internal impedance of the SSR side can be obtained.  
The following shows equivalent circuits and related formulas.  
• Description of Symbols  
(1) Details  
IO  
: Setting output current of controller (setting range: 2 to 22mA)  
: Maximum applied load voltage (approx. 14.7V)  
: Actual input voltage to SSR  
VO  
VSSR’  
VSSR  
: Input rated voltage range of SSR (VSSR/MIN to VSSR/MAX)  
VSSR/MIN : Minimum input rated voltage of SSR  
VSSR/MAX : Maximum input rated voltage of SSR  
Z
: Internal impedance of SSR  
VD  
: Internal voltage drop of SSR (normally 1 to 2V)  
(2) Equivalent circuit when one SSR is connected  
DCP301  
SSR  
+
+
Z
I
O
VSSR'  
(VO  
)
VD  
Formulas (1) and (2) formulas must be satisfied.  
(1) formula VSSR/MIN IO x Z + VD VO  
(2) formula VSSR' < VSSR/MAX  
(VSSR' = IO x Z + VD)  
7-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
(3) Equivalent circuit when N number of SSRs are connected in series  
DCP301  
SSR 1  
+
+
Z
IO  
(VO)  
VSSR'  
VD  
SSR N  
+
Z
VSSR'  
VD  
Formulas (3) and (4) formulas must be satisfied.  
(3) formula VSSR/MIN IO x Z + VD VO/N  
(4) formula VSSR' VSSR/MAX  
(VSSR' = IO x Z + VD)  
(4) Equivalent circuit when N number of SSRs are connected in parallel  
DCP301  
SSR 1  
SSR N  
+
+
+
IO/N  
IO/N  
Z
Z
IO  
(VO)  
VSSR'  
VSSR'  
VD  
VD  
Formulas (5) and (6) formulas must be satisfied.  
(5) formula VSSR/MIN IO/N x Z + VD VO  
(6) formula VSSR' VSSR/MAX  
(VSSR' = IO/N x Z + VD)  
7-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
(5) Example: Using Yamatake Corporations PGM  
VSSR : 3 to 6V  
Z
VD  
: 260Ω ± 5%  
: 0.8 to 1.3V  
What value should IO be set to when connecting one PGM?  
As shown in the figure on the right, a fixed-current system is used for the voltage  
output of this controller. The fixed current can be calculated as follows from the  
input voltage range of PGM.  
Z
8.9mA 1 17.2mA  
IMIN x ZMIN + VD/MIN > 3  
IMIN > 8.9mA  
I
VD  
IMAX x ZMAX + VD/MAX < 6  
IMAX < 17.2mA  
DCP301  
PGM  
How many PGMs can be connected?  
A current of 8.9mA or more must flow to a single PGM. On the other hand, the  
maximum current of the controller is 22.0mA. Accordingly, two PGMs can be con-  
nected in parallel.  
In the case of a series connection, due to the maximum output current (22.0mA)  
and allowable load resistance (600), the maximum voltage that can be applied to  
a load becomes 13.2V (22.0mA x 600).  
When a current of 8.9mA flows to a PGM, the maximum voltage at both of its input  
terminals becomes 3.7V.  
0.0089 x 260 x 1.05 + 1.3 = 3.7V  
Accordingly, 13.2 ÷ 3.7 = 3.56, which means that three PGMs can be connected in  
series.  
The above calculation assumes operation in the worst conditions. For example,  
even if four PGMs are connected in series, they should operate normally if a volt-  
age of 3V or more is applied to each of the PGMs in a voltage ON state.  
C q 0 (Special functions)  
Normally set to 0.  
In the case of setup 102, current output (including heat-cool output) 0 to 100% for the  
control output becomes 0 to 20mA. Note, however, that at 0% or less, the current is  
0mA.  
At output 1mA or less, accuracy is ±0.5%.  
In the case of setup 103, current output (including heat-cool output) and auxiliary out-  
put 0 to 100% for the control output becomes 0 to 20mA. Note, however, that at 0% or  
less, the current is 0mA.  
At output 1mA or less, accuracy is ±0.5%.  
When the input 1 range type (C 0 3) is an RTD in setup 241, Zener barrier adjustment  
(C 9 1) is displayed.  
7-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
C q 1 (Input 1 Zener barrier adjustment)  
The following adjustment must be made when using a Zener barrier.  
(1) Turn the DCP301 OFF. When you have finished mounting and wiring the DCP301,  
short-circuit across A and B on the terminals of the RTD.  
C
DCP301  
32  
33  
34  
Zener barrier  
Zener barrier  
Zener barrier  
B
A
Short-circuit  
(2) Turn the DCP301 ON again, and set setup data C q 0 setting to 241. For details on  
how to change settings, see 7-1 Parameter Setup (page 7-1).  
(3) Display the setup data C q 1 setting.  
ENT  
(4) Press  
to display the difference (AB) between the resistances of the Zener bar-  
rier connected to leads A and B on the lower display.  
ENT  
(5) Press  
to memorize the difference (AB) between the resistances to the control-  
ler.  
DISP  
(6) Press  
to set the DCP301 to the basic display state.  
(7) Turn the power OFF, and remove the short across A and B.  
Handling Precautions  
The resistance error of the Zener barrier connected to leads A and B cannot be  
adjusted unless it is 20or less.  
This adjustment is not required when a Zener barrier and an input other than  
an RTD are not used.  
Once the Zener barrier has been adjusted, compensation is carried out on the  
Zener barrier. When using on an RTD without a Zener barrier, re-adjust without  
the Zener barrier.  
7-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
C 9 3 (CPL communications port selection)  
When set to 0, CPL communications from the loader jack is not possible. In this case,  
CPL communications is possible from the addon terminal under setup C 8 4 and C 8 5  
communications conditions if the controller model supports CPL communications.  
When set to 1 to 15, CPL communications from the loader jack is not possible, and the  
C 9 3 setting becomes the CPL communications address.  
Communications conditions are also 4800bps, even parity and 1 stop bit.  
In this case, CPL communications is not possible from the addon terminal even if the  
controller model supports CPL communications.  
Use the special cable to connect the RS-232C port on the personal computer and the  
loader jack on the equipment.  
When the setup C 0 0 (ROM revision) setting indication is 0 or 1, the setup C 9 3  
setting indication cannot be set at ---.  
Also, communications from the loader jack is not possible.  
7-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Table data settings T B L”  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
-1999 to 9999U  
[Note]  
Input linearization table  
approximation A1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
T -A . 1  
T -A . 2  
T -A . 3  
T -A . 4  
T -A . 5  
T -A . 6  
T -A . 7  
T -A . 8  
T -A . q  
0U  
When setup data C 0 8 setting is 0, “– – – –” is  
displayed and setting is not possible.  
Input linearization table  
approximation A2  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
0U  
Item An displays input (X-axis) and Bn displays output  
(Y-axis). In principle, set so that A1 is A2, A2 A3  
and so forth up to A10 A11. Linear interpolation is  
carried out between points on the linearization table.  
The ends of the linearization table are fixed to (A0,  
B0) = (-2000, -2000) and (A12, B12) = (10000, 10000).  
When AnX An+1, Y becomes (X-An) x (Bn+1-Bn)/(An+1-  
An)+Bn.  
Input linearization table  
approximation A3  
Input linearization table  
approximation A4  
Input linearization table  
approximation A5  
Input linearization table  
approximation A6  
Input linearization table  
approximation A7  
Input linearization table  
approximation A8  
Input linearization table  
approximation A9  
10 T -A . A  
11 T -A . B  
12 T -B . 1  
13 T -B . 2  
14 T -B . 3  
15 T -B . 4  
16 T -B . 5  
17 T -B . 6  
18 T -B . 7  
19 T -B . 8  
20 T -B . Q  
21 T -B . A  
22 T -B . B  
Input linearization table  
approximation A10  
Input linearization table  
approximation A11  
Input linearization table  
approximation B1  
Input linearization table  
approximation B2  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
1000U  
Input linearization table  
approximation B3  
Input linearization table  
approximation B4  
Input linearization table  
approximation B5  
Input linearization table  
approximation B6  
Input linearization table  
approximation B7  
Input linearization table  
approximation B8  
Input linearization table  
approximation B9  
Input linearization table  
approximation B10  
Input linearization table  
approximation B11  
7-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Description of table data settings  
t -A . 1 to t -A . b  
t -b . 1 to t -b . b  
These settings are for the A-axis (input) and B-axis (output) settings of input 1 linear-  
ization table approximation.  
Both ends of the linearization table are fixed at -2000U, -2000U and 10000U,10000U.  
The linearization table is formed by connecting 11 points of table data settings be-  
tween the two ends.  
Table data is set not by percentages but directly by engineering unit. When the range  
type is set to linear, set scaled values.  
Fixed value  
B-axis (output)  
(10000, 10000)  
11  
10  
8
9
7
6
5
A-axis (input)  
4
3
2
1
Fixed value  
(-2000, -2000)  
Points on the broken-line, An and Bn, must be set so that they increase in the following  
way (A1, B1) = (0, 0), (A2, B2) = (100, 100) and so forth. If set points break this relation-  
ship, the point in conflict must be excluded to create the linearization table.  
B-axis  
B-axis  
Excluded  
(A3, B3)  
(A3, B3)  
(A2, B2)  
(A2, B2)  
(A1, B1)  
(A1, B1)  
A-axis  
A-axis  
When two equal points such as A1 and A2 are set for the A-axis, B1 shall be taken as the  
output value.  
B-axis  
(A2, B2)  
(A1, B1)  
A-axis  
7-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP  
Constant-value operation data settings C N S t”  
No. Item Code  
Item  
Factory  
Setting Setting  
User  
Setting  
1
M .O D E  
0
0: Program operation  
Operation mode  
1: Constant-value operation  
[Note]  
This setting can be changed only in the READY mode.  
This setting can be set in the SP1 lower to upper limit  
range in setup data settings C 0 q and C 1 0.  
2
3
4
5
6
S P  
0
SP1  
[Note]  
S P 2  
E V 1  
E V 2  
E V 3  
0
Unused  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
-1999 to 9999U (event type is deviation or SP)  
9999  
9999  
9999  
Event 1 setting  
value  
0 to 9999U  
(event type is absolute value deviation)  
-10.0 to 110.0% (event type is MV or MFB)  
[Note]  
Event 2 setting  
value  
When the event configuration data type setting is 50  
for each event, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not  
possible.  
Event 3 setting  
value  
[Note]  
7
8
Unused  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
Unused  
9
Unused  
10  
Unused  
11 P .  
Proportional band  
(CH1)  
100.0  
P
: 0.0 to 999.9% (0D, 6D output models)  
0.0 enables ON-OFF control.  
0.1 to 999.9% (models other than 0D and 6D  
models)  
12 I .  
13 D .  
Reset time (CH1)  
Rate time (CH1)  
0
0
14 O L .  
15 O H .  
16 R E .  
17 B R .  
18 D P .  
MV lower limit (CH1) 0.0  
I
: 0 to 3600s  
MV upper limit (CH1)  
Manual reset (CH1)  
Brake (CH1)  
100.0  
0 disables integral action.  
: 0 to 1200s  
50.0  
0
D
0 disables derivative action.  
Disturbance inhibit  
proportional band  
(CH1)  
100.0  
O L : -10.0 to MV upper limit %  
O H : MV lower limit to 110.0%  
R E : 0.0 to 100.0%  
19 D I .  
Disturbance inhibit  
reset time (CH1)  
Disturbance inhibit  
rate time (CH1)  
120  
0
B R : 0 to 30  
0 disables the brake function.  
D P : 0.1 to 999.9%  
20 D D .  
D I : 1 to 3600s  
Proportional band  
(for cool control)  
Reset time (CH1)  
(for cool control)  
Rate time (CH1) (for  
cool control)  
21 P .-C  
22 I .-C  
23 D .-C  
24 O L .-C  
25 O H .-C  
26 R E .-C  
100.0  
0
D D : 0 to 1200  
0 disables derivative action.  
[Note]  
0
• On 0D and 6D output models, when P setting is 0.0,  
ON-OFF control is enabled. “– – – –” is displayed for  
items I, D, O L, O H, R E, D P, D I and D D, and  
setting is not possible.  
MV lower limit (CH1)  
(for cool control)  
MV upper limit (CH1)  
(for cool control)  
Manual reset (CH1)  
(for cool control)  
0.0  
100.0  
50.0  
• When variable parameter M .-C setting is 2 (estimated  
position control only) on 2G output models, “– – – –” is  
displayed for items OL and OH, and setting is not  
possible.  
• When I setting is not 0, “– – – –” is displayed for R E  
and setting is not possible.  
• When variable parameter S T setting is 0 (smart-tuning  
disabled), “– – – –” is displayed for B R and setting is  
not possible.  
• When variable parameter 2 P I D setting is 0 (2  
degrees of freedom PID disabled), the items for D P,  
D I, D D are not displayed.  
For details, see the Note for PID parameters.  
[Note]  
27  
28  
29  
30  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
“– – – ” is displayed and setting is not possible.  
7-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
8-1 Program Setup  
Programs can be set up when the DCP301 is in the basic display state. This is sometimes referred to as “program-  
ming” in this manual.  
DISP  
If the DCP301 is not in the basic display state, press  
to set the controller to the basic display state.  
Programming can be carried out more easily if the details of the setup are entered to a program chart before starting  
programming.  
How to enter program setup  
Key operation  
FUNC  
PROG  
Press  
+
in the basic display state to enter program setup.  
In the program setup state, the PRG LED on the console lights, and the decimal points in  
the program No. display and segment No. display light. However, note that the DCP301  
does not enter the program setup state in the following cases:  
- When in the constant-value operation mode (when constant-value operation data  
M . O d e setting is 1)  
- When key lock is active (variable parameter L O C is set to 2 or 4)  
Also, the setup cannot be changed even if the DCP301 is in the program setup in the  
following case:  
- When the program is protected (variable parameter P R t C is set to 1)  
Display start items  
When the DCP301 enters the program setup state, display starts from the program No.  
and the segment No. pattern item.  
Selecting the program No. to set up  
There are two ways of selecting the program No. to set up.  
- Selecting the program No. before entering program setup  
- Selecting the program No. after entering program setup  
Selecting the program No. before entering program setup  
PROG  
To select the program No. press  
in the READY mode.  
or  
if the DCP301 is in the basic display state  
Handling Precautions  
The program No. cannot be selected on the DCP301 when selecting the pro-  
gram No. by external switch inputs.  
For details, see 6-3 Program Selection (page 6-7).  
Selecting the program No. after entering program setup  
FUNC  
PROG  
Each press of  
19 is reached, the program No. returns to 1. Likewise, each press of  
the program No. When 1 is returned to, the program No. advances to 19.  
+
in the program setup state increments the program No. When  
FUNC  
+
decrements  
However, note that when setup values are being entered (setting value is blinking) during  
ENT  
FUNC  
PROG  
program setup, press  
first to quit entry of values and then press  
+
or  
FUNC  
+
to change the program No.  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Selecting the program No. after entering program setup (continued)  
When you select the program No. by this method, the display changes to segment No.1  
and the pattern item on the programming map.  
This method can be used, for example, to select a program No. to set up a program other  
than the No. being operated in the RUN mode. It can also be used to select a program No.  
to set up a program other than the currently selected No. by external switch input.  
Mode transition  
The following diagram shows the transition between modes during program setup.  
The following page describes the various mode transition states (1) to (16) in the dia-  
gram.  
Basic Display State  
FUNC  
DISP  
+
PROG keys (1)  
key (16)  
FUNC  
FUNC  
PROG keys  
Program setup state  
+
+
key (2)  
key (3)  
keys (15)  
Setting value display state  
ENT  
ENT  
ENT  
FUNC  
key (4)  
key  
+
keys (12)  
FUNC  
CLR  
keys (10)  
ENT  
+
key  
(pattern item)  
DISP  
DISP  
DISP  
key (11)  
key (11)  
key (14)  
Segment insertion  
or deletion check  
state  
No.1 setting  
entry state  
No.2 setting  
entry state  
ENT  
I N S .” blinking  
d E L .” blinking  
key  
FUNC  
CLR  
+
keys (6)  
key (13)  
key (9)  
key (5)  
FUNC  
CLR  
+
keys (7)  
(pattern item)  
Program clear  
check state  
ENT  
C L R .” blinking  
key  
DISP  
key (8)  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Description of mode transition states (see page 8-2.)  
(1) Program setup is entered.  
(2) Setup item on programming map is moved.  
(3) Segment on programming map is moved.  
(4) Entry of the No.1 setup is started.  
(5) No.1 setting value incremented/decremented, and blinking digit is moved.  
(6) Entry of No.1 setup is completed.  
ENT  
stores the value being entered to memory.  
With items having a No.2 setup, entry of the No.2 setup value is started. When the  
item does not have a No.2 setup, the setup display is returned to.  
FUNC  
CLR  
When  
+
are pressed at an event/time event item, the setting for that seg-  
ment is cleared.  
FUNC  
CLR  
When  
+
are pressed at a G.Soak item, the setting for that segment is cleared.  
FUNC  
CLR  
(7) Pressing  
+
for a pattern item causes “C L R .” to blink to confirm clearing  
of the program from that segment onwards.  
ENT  
FUNC  
However, note that  
+
is disabled for currently running programs.  
ENT  
(8)  
clears the program from that segment onwards.  
DISP  
does not clear the program and the setting display is returned to.  
(9) No.2 setup setting value incremented/decremented, and blinking digit moved  
(
10) Entry of No.2 setup is completed.  
ENT  
stores the value being entered to memory.  
FUNC  
CLR  
When  
+
are pressed at an event/time event item, the setting for that seg-  
ment is cleared.  
(
(
11) Entry of values currently being entered completed without being stored to memory  
ENT  
FUNC  
12) When  
+
are pressed at a pattern item, the display changes to the segment  
insert/delete screen, and “I n S .” is blinks.  
ENT  
FUNC  
However, note that  
+
is disabled for currently running programs.  
(
(
13) “d E L .” displayed blinking by  
, and “I n S .” displayed blinking by  
.
ENT  
ENT  
14) If  
is pressed at the “I n S .” display, a segment is inserted. If  
is pressed, a  
segment is “d E L .”.  
DISP  
(
(
15) If  
is pressed, neither of segment delete or insert are carried out.  
FUNC  
FUNC  
PROG  
Press  
gram Nos.  
+
to increment program Nos, and  
+
to decrement pro-  
16) Basic display state is returned to.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Programming map  
As shown in the figure below, the programming map is arranged in a matrix with the  
segment Nos. aligned along the horizontal axis and program setup items arranged along  
the vertical axis.  
The area surrounded by thick black lines indicates the items that can be designated by  
segment No. and program setup item in the program setup state.  
,
,
:
Moves to the left or right (i.e. moves segments)  
Moves up or down (i.e. moves program items).  
:
The programming map below shows an example where segments No.1 to No.10 have  
been set up.  
Shaded items  
cannot be moved.  
Segment No.  
. . . .  
Program (1) No.1 setting  
1
2
10  
11  
12 to 30 Remarks  
Items  
(2) No.2 setting  
Pattern  
(1) SP1  
1 0 0  
1 0 0 0  
3 . 0 0  
1 0 0  
- - - -  
- - - -  
*1  
*2  
(2) Time  
0 . 3 0  
1 1 0 0  
1 0 . 0 0  
- - - -  
Event 1  
Event 2  
Event 3  
(1) Operating point (ON time)  
(2) (OFF time)  
(1) Operating point (ON time)  
(2) (OFF time)  
(1) Operating point (ON time)  
(2) (OFF time)  
(1) ON time  
- - - -  
- - - -  
3 0  
- - - -  
0 . 0 0  
0 . 0 1  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
1
0 . 0 0  
0 . 0 1  
0 . 0 0  
1 . 0 0  
1 . 0 0  
2 . 0 0  
2 . 0 0  
3 . 0 0  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
2
0 . 0 0  
0 . 0 1  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
- - - -  
0 . 0 0  
- - - -  
8
Time  
event 1  
*3  
(2) OFF time  
Time  
event 2  
(1) ON time  
(2) OFF time  
Time  
event 3  
(1) ON time  
(2) OFF time  
Time  
event 4  
(1) ON time  
(2) OFF time  
Time  
event 5  
(1) ON time  
(2) OFF time  
PID set No. (CH1)  
G.Soak (CH1)  
G.Soak time-out  
PV start  
*4  
*5  
- - - -  
- - - -  
1
- - - -  
- - - -  
1
- - - -  
- - - -  
1
Cycle  
0
0
0
Pattern link  
0
0
0
*1 The No.10 segment is the final segment. A non-set segment is shown in the No.11  
segment.  
*2 As PV type event is selected as the PV type for events 1 and 2, only the No.1 setting  
can be set up. As time event is selected as the event type for event 3, the No.1 and  
No.2 settings can be set up.  
*3 As all time events are selected as the event type in the time event, the No.1 and No.2  
settings can be set up.  
*4 This can be set as controller functions are selected and PID or ON-OFF control is  
carried out.  
*5 As these are setting items for each program, the display and setting are common for  
all segments.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Display details  
The following figure shows the conventions used for displays in this manual.  
Program/Segment No. Display  
Displays program/segment No. currently being set up.  
Decimal point blinks in program setup state.  
Basic indicator LED lamps  
: LED lit  
Program No. Segment No.  
– – – –  
– – – –  
Upper display  
Lower display  
Pattern  
tendency  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
Event LEDs  
Profile Display  
Setting up pattern items  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the pattern item of the segment to be set up on the  
programming map.  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup SP setting.  
Setting range: SP1 lower to upper limit  
(Set the SP1 limit in setup data C 0 Q or C 1 0.)  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the upper display stops. The lower display then  
starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the No.2 setup.  
(5) Press  
,
,
or  
to set to the No.2 setup time setting.  
Setting range: 0:00 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)  
0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)  
(Select either of h:min or min:s as the time unit in setup data C 6 4. “:” is substi-  
tuted by “.” as it cannot be displayed.)  
ENT  
(6) When you press  
, blinking on the lower display stops.  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
SP1 setting value  
Time setting value  
SP  
TM  
Pattern  
tendency  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
“- - - -” is displayed for the SP and time setting values in non-set segments.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Setting up events 1 to 3 items  
When event type is PV type event  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the event 1 to 3 items of the segment to be set up  
on the programming map.  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
Setting range: -1999 to 9999U  
0 to 9999U (in case of absolute value deviation event)  
,
,
or  
to set to the No.1 setup event operating point setting.  
-10.0 to 110.0% (in case of MV, MFB event)  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the upper display stops.  
FUNC  
CLR  
(When  
ing.)  
+
are pressed, the upper display returns to “- - - -” and stops blink-  
Display (PV type event)  
Program No. Segment No.  
Operating point setting value  
Pattern  
tendency  
LEDs corresponding to EV1 to EV3 lit. T1 to T5 all out  
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.  
• When setup data C 6 8 is set to 1, event 1 to 3 items on the programming map are  
skipped and not displayed.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
When event type is time event  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the event 1 to 3 items of the segment to be set up  
on the programming map.  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup ON time setting.  
Setting range: 0:00 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)  
0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)  
(Select either of h:min or min:s as the time unit in setup data C 6 4. “:” is substituted  
by “.” as it cannot be displayed.)  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the upper display stops. The lower display then  
starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the No.2 setup.  
FUNC  
CLR  
(When  
+
are pressed, the upper and lower displays both return to “- - - -”  
or to set to the No.2 setup ON time setting.  
and blinking stops.)  
(5) Press  
,
,
Setting range: ON time setting + 0:01 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)  
ON time setting + 0.1 to 599.9 (0.1s)  
ENT  
When you press  
, blinking on the upper display stops.  
FUNC  
CLR  
(6) (When  
ing.)  
+
are pressed, the upper display returns to “- - - -” and stops blink-  
Display (time event)  
Program No. Segment No.  
ON time setting value  
OFF time setting value  
Pattern  
tendency  
LEDs corresponding to EV1 to EV3 lit. T1 to T5 all out  
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.  
• When setup data C 6 8 is set to 1, event 1 to 3 items on the programming map are all  
skipped and not displayed.  
• When the event type is set to time event and the ON time is set to 99:59, “- - - -” is  
displayed for the ON time and the display does not blink. In this case, the OFF time  
cannot be set.  
• When the event type is set to time event and the ON time is set higher than the time  
setting of the pattern item, event output at that segment is OFF. However, note that  
event output is ON when the mode changes to the END mode at segments whose ON  
time and pattern item time are equal.  
When event type is controller status event  
In this case, the event item on the programming map is skipped and not displayed.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
T
                                   
                                     
T
                                     
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Setting up time events 1 to 5  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the event 1 to 5 items of the segment to be set up  
on the programming map.  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup ON time setting.  
Setting range: 0:00 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)  
0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)  
(Select either of h:min or min:s as the time unit in setup data C 6 4. “:” is substituted by  
“.” as it cannot be displayed.)  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the upper display stops. The lower display then  
starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the No.2 setup.  
FUNC  
CLR  
(When  
+
are pressed, the upper and lower displays both return to “- - - -”  
and blinking stops.)  
(5) Press  
,
,
or to set to the No.2 setup ON time setting.  
Setting range: ON time setting + 0:01 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)  
ON time setting + 0.1 to 599.9 (0.1s)  
ENT  
(6) When you press  
, blinking on the upper display stops.  
FUNC  
CLR  
(When  
+
are pressed, the upper display returns to “- - - -” and stops blinking.)  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
ON time setting value  
OFF time setting value  
Pattern  
tendency  
LEDs corresponding to EV1 to EV3 lit. T1 to T5 all out  
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.  
• On models that do not support time events, event 1 to 5 items on the programming map  
are all skipped and not displayed. The table below shows time events by a «.  
Time event No.  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
setting value  
0
1
2
3
4
5
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
• When setup data C 6 Q is set to 1, event 1 to 5 items on the programming map are all  
skipped and not displayed.  
• When the ON time is set to 99:59, “- - - -” is displayed as the OFF time, and the display  
does not blink.  
• When the ON time is set higher than the time setting of the pattern item, event output  
at that segment is OFF. However, note that event output is ON when the mode changes  
to the END mode at segments whose ON time and pattern item time are equal.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Setting up PID set No. items  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the PID set No. items of the segment to be set up  
on the programming map.  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup PID set No. setting.  
Setting range: 0 to 8 (non heat/cool models)  
0 to 4 (heat/cool models)  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the upper display stops.  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
PI D  
Pattern  
tendency  
PID set No. setting value  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
• When setup data C 1 1 is set to 1 and PID set auto-switching ON is selected, the PID set  
No. items on the programming map are skipped and not displayed.  
• On 5G output models, when setup data C 1 8 is set to 1 and programmer functions are  
selected, the PID set No. items on the programming map are skipped and not dis-  
played.  
• On 3D output models, when setup data C 4 5 is set to 1 and 3-position-proportional  
control is selected, the PID set No. items on the programming map are skipped and not  
displayed.  
• When setup data C 7 0 is set to 1, the PID set No. items on the programming map are all  
skipped and not displayed.  
• When the PID set No. setting is set to 0, this means that the PID set No. of the previous  
segment is continued. When the PID set No. setting is set to 0 in the No.1 segments,  
this is the same as being set to 1.  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Setting up G.Soak (guarantee soak) items  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the G.Soak item of the segment to be set up on the  
programming map.  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
,
,
or  
to set to the G.Soak width setting.  
Setting range: 0 to 1000U  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the lower display stops.  
FUNC  
CLR  
(When  
stops.)  
+
are pressed, the lower display returns to “- - - -” and blinking  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
G. S.  
Pattern  
tendency  
G.Soak setting value  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.  
The G.Soak function does not work in non-set segments.  
• When setup data C 7 0 is set to 1, G.Soak items on the programming map are skipped  
and not displayed.  
Setting up G.Soak time-out items  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the G.Soak time-out item of the segment to be set  
up on the programming map.  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
,
,
or to set to the G.Soak time-out width setting.  
Setting range: 0:00 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)  
0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)  
(Select either of h:min or min:s as the time unit is setup data C64.  
“:” is substituted by “.” as it cannot display.)  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the lower display stops.  
FUNC  
CLR  
(When  
stops.)  
+
are pressed, the lower display returns to “- - - -” and blinking  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
G. S. t O  
Pattern  
tendency  
G.Soak time -out setting value  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.  
The G.Soak time out function does not work in non-set segments.  
• When setup data C 7 0 is set to 1, G.Soak time-out items on the programming map are  
skipped and not displayed.  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Setting up PV start items  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the PV start items on the programming map.  
(The settings are common to all segments as the PV start items are setting items  
provided for each program.)  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
,
,
or  
to set to the No.1 setup PV start setting.  
Setting range: 0 to 1  
0:PV start disabled  
1:PV start enabled  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the lower display stops.  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
P.S T A  
Pattern  
tendency  
PV start setting value  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
• The settings are common to all segments as the PV start items are setting items pro-  
vided for each program.  
• When setup data C 7 1 is set to 1, PV start items on the programming map are skipped  
and not displayed.  
Setting up cycle items  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the cycle items on the programming map.  
(The settings are common to all segments as the cycle items are setting items pro-  
vided for each program.)  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup cycle setting.  
Setting range: 0 to 9999  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the lower display stops.  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
C Y C L  
Pattern  
tendency  
Cycle count setting value  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
• The settings are common to all segments as the cycle items are setting items provided  
for each program.  
• When setup data C 7 1 is set to 1, cycle items on the programming map are skipped and  
not displayed.  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Setting up pattern link items  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the pattern link items on the programming map.  
(The settings are common to all segments as the pattern link items are setting items  
provided for each program.)  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(3) Press  
Setting range: 0 to 19  
0:Pattern link disabled  
,
,
or  
to set to the No.1 setup pattern link setting.  
1 to 19: Pattern link destination program No.  
ENT  
(4) When you press  
, blinking on the lower display stops.  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
P.L I N  
Pattern  
tendency  
Link destination program No.  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
• The settings are common to all segments as the pattern link items are setting items  
provided for each program.  
• When setup data C 7 1 is set to 1, pattern link items on the programming map are  
skipped and not displayed.  
Deleting programs  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the pattern item of the segment from which the  
program is to deleted on the programming map.  
To delete all the segments of a particular program, move to the No.1 segment.  
ENT  
(2) If you press  
No.1 setup.  
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the  
(So far, the procedure is the same as that for setting the pattern item.)  
FUNC  
CLR  
(3) If you press  
+
, the display changes to confirm clearing of the program, and  
C L R .” is displayed blinking in the upper display.  
ENT  
(4) Press  
to execute deletion of the program.  
(5) The DCP301 returns to the setting display state, both the upper and lower displays  
change to “- - - -” to indicate no setting.  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
C L R.  
Pattern  
tendency  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
FUNC  
CLR  
• In the above procedure,  
+
are pressed while entering values (SP setting value)  
to the No.1 setup. However, the program can also be deleted by pressing  
FUNC  
CLR  
+
while entering values (time setting value) to the No.2 setup.  
• “- - - -” is displayed for the SP and time setting values in non-set segments.  
• Currently running (RUN, HOLD, FAST, END) programs cannot be deleted.  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
Inserting and deleting segments  
(1) In the setting display state, move to the pattern item of the segment where the seg-  
ment is to be inserted or deleted on the programming map.  
ENT  
FUNC  
(2) If you press  
+
, the display changes to confirm insertion of the segment,  
and “I N S .” is displayed blinking in the upper display.  
(3) If you press  
, the display changes to confirm insertion of the segment, and “I N S .”  
is displayed blinking in the upper display.  
If you press  
, the display changes to confirm deletion of the segment, and “D E L .”  
is displayed blinking in the upper display.  
ENT  
(4) If you press  
inserted.  
while “I N S .” is displayed on the upper display, the segment is  
ENT  
If you press  
deleted.  
while “D E L .” is displayed on the upper display, the segment is  
(5) The DCP301 returns to the setting display state.  
Display (inserting segment)  
Program No. Segment No.  
I N S.  
Pattern  
tendency  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
Display (deleting segment)  
Program No. Segment No.  
D E L .  
Pattern  
tendency  
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out  
• When you insert a segment, a new segment is automatically created at the currently  
displayed segment No., and all segment Nos. onward are incremented by one. The  
setting of the inserted segment is as follows:  
SP setting value: Same value as original segment before the new segment was in serted  
Time setting value: 0:10  
Events, time events and G.Soak are not set, and the PID set No. is set to 0.  
• If you try to insert a segment in a program already containing 30 segments, pressing  
ENT  
will not insert the segment.  
• When you delete a segment, the next segment shifts down to the currently displayed  
segment No. and subsequent segment Nos. are decremented by one.  
When you delete the last segment, the display changes to “- - - -” indicating that noth-  
ing is set.  
• Segments cannot be inserted or deleted from currently running (RUN, HOLD, FAST,  
END) programs.  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
8-2 Copying Programs  
The DCP301 can be set for copying programs in the program operation READY mode in the basic display state. If the  
DISP  
DCP301 is not in the basic display state, press  
.
Operation  
(1) Set the DCP301 to the program operation READY mode.  
Set variable parameter L O C to either of 0, 1 or 3, and variable parameter P R T C to 0.  
PROG  
(2) In the basic display state, press  
or  
to select the copy source program No.  
However, note that the program No. cannot be selected on the console when control-  
ling the DCP301 by external switch inputs.  
For details, see 6-3 Program Selection (page 6-7).  
PROG  
(3) If you press  
+
, “C O P Y” is displayed on the upper display, and the copy  
destination program No. is displayed on the lower display.  
(4) If you press or , currently non-set program Nos. are displayed blinking in  
order as the copy destination program No.  
When there are no non-set program Nos., “- - - -” is displayed on the lower display.  
ENT  
(5) If you press  
, program copy is executed, and the lower display stops blinking. To  
repeat the procedure, carry out steps (4) and (5) again.  
DISP  
(6) To quit program copy, press  
.
Display  
Program No.  
C O P Y  
Copy destination program No.  
Output state of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP  
8-3 General Reset  
A general reset can be executed when the DCP301 is in the READY AUTO mode in the basic display state. If the  
DISP  
DCP301 is not in the basic display state, press  
.
A “general reset” involves the following operations:  
• Clearing all program setups for program Nos.1 to 19  
• Returning parameter setups to their factory settings  
• Changing the mode to the program operation READY AUTO mode  
Operation  
(1) Set the DCP301 to the READY AUTO mode.  
Set variable parameter L O C and P R T C to 0.  
FUNC  
CLR  
DISP  
(2) If you press  
+
+
in the basic display state, the display changes to con-  
firm execution of general reset, and “G . R E S” is displayed on the upper display.  
ENT  
(3) If you press  
power ON.  
, the general reset is executed, and operation starts from startup at  
If you press DISP , general reset is not executed, and the DCP301 returns to the basic  
display state.  
Display  
Program No. Segment No.  
G .R E S  
Pattern  
tendency  
Output state of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5  
In the constant-value operation mode, all of the program No., segment No. and profiles displays  
are cleared.  
• If a RAM backup error occurs when the power is turned ON, the display changes to  
confirm general reset without pressing any of the keys on the console, and “G . R E S”  
is displayed in the upper display.  
ENT  
If you press  
ated.  
, the general reset is executed. Other keys, however, cannot be oper-  
• The following setup data items are not returned to their factory settings.  
C 0 2, C 0 3: Save setting values.  
However, note that if a RAM backup error occurs when the power is  
turned ON, C 0 2 and C 0 3 settings become 0.  
C 0 4, C 0 5: These are set to 0 when the input 1 range type is set to linear.  
C 0 6:  
This is set to 1000 when the input 1 range type is set to linear.  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
9-1 Self-diagnostics and Alarm Code Display  
Self-diagnostics functions are incorporated into the controller. The table on the following page shows the alarm codes  
that are displayed as a result of self-diagnostics.  
Self-diagnostics at power ON  
PROM error  
An error in the system program stored to PROM has been detected. However, note that  
not all PROM errors are detected. Some errors are detected as controller operation errors.  
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.  
Adjustment value error  
An error in the analog I/O adjustment data stored to volatile memory has been detected.  
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.  
RAM backup error  
An error in the RAM backup function has been detected.  
When this error is detected, a general reset is carried out.  
An alarm code is not displayed for this error.  
Board configuration error  
An error in the board configuration (combination of different PCBs) has been detected  
according to the catalog No. of the controller.  
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.  
Self-diagnostics at each sampling cycle  
Analog input error  
A probable cause of this error is a disconnected analog input. This error is detected when  
the analog input is outside the -10.0 to 110.0% range.  
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.  
MFB (motor feedback) input error  
Disconnected MFB input or a short-circuit has been detected on 2G output models.  
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.  
Intermittent self-diagnostics during operation  
Program error  
An error in the program setup data stored to backup RAM has been detected.  
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.  
Parameter error  
An error in the parameter setup data stored to backup RAM has been detected.  
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.  
Low battery voltage error  
A drop in the battery voltage for backing up RAM data has been detected.  
When the low battery voltage error is detected, the red BAT LED on the console blinks.  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
Self-diagnostics only when certain functions are operating  
MFB (motor feedback) adjustment error  
This error is detected when MFB automatic adjustment is not going smoothly on 2G  
output models.  
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.  
To clear this alarm, either execute automatic adjustment again or turn the power OFF  
then back ON again.  
Alarm code display  
When an input error or controller error is detected in the basic display state, the alarm  
code and regular display are displayed alternately every second on the program No. and  
segment No. displays. The table below shows alarm codes and alarm descriptions.  
When two or more alarms occur at the same time, the alarm codes are displayed from the  
smallest number upwards together with the regular display.  
However, note that when setup data C 6 7 has been set to “1”, alarm codes are not dis-  
played.  
Alarm categories  
PV range alarm groups: A L 0 1 to A L 1 2  
Controller alarm groups: A L 8 1 to A L Q Q, and low battery voltage  
(BAT LED on console blinks in case of low battery voltage.)  
Remedy  
Check input 1  
Alarm Code  
Alarm Name  
Description  
A L 0 1  
A L 0 2  
A L 0 7  
A L 0 8  
Input 1 over-range  
Input 1 has exceeded 110%FS  
Input 1 has fallen below -10%FS  
RTD line A is disconnected.  
Input 1 under-range  
Input 1 RTD disconnection A  
Input 1 RTD disconnection B  
Check line of RTD (resis-  
tance temperature detector)  
connected to input 1 for  
disconnection, and terminal  
connections.  
RTD line B or lines ABC are  
disconnected.  
A L 0 q  
A L 1 0  
Input 1 RTD disconnection C RTD line C is disconnected.  
MFB disconnection  
MFB (Y, T, G) line(s) is  
disconnected.  
Check MFB wiring.  
A L 1 1  
A L 1 2  
MFB short-circuit  
Y-G line or Y-T-G line is short-  
circuited.  
Check wiring of MFB switch-  
ing relay or motor specifica-  
tions.  
MFB adjustment impossible  
Faulty wiring, motor  
incompatibility etc.  
Ask for repair.  
Ask for repair.  
A/D converter has malfunctioned.  
Faulty board configuration  
A L 7 0  
A L 8 1  
A L q 6  
A/D trouble  
Board configuration error  
Program error  
Check program setup, and  
reset damaged data. *1  
Damaged program setup data  
Check parameter setup, and  
reset damaged data. *2  
Damaged parameter setup data  
A L q 7  
A L q 8  
A L q q  
Parameter error  
Adjustment value error  
PROM error  
Ask for repair.  
Damaged analog input/output  
adjustment data  
Ask for repair.  
Damaged system program  
*1 A L q 6 goes out even if program setup data other the damaged data is reset.  
*2 A L q 7 goes out even if parameter setup data other the damaged data is reset.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
9-2 Trouble during Key Entry  
PROG  
The program No. does not change by pressing  
in basic display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
Program selection by external switch input not  
0.  
Set all external switch inputs RSW8 to 12 OFF.  
The controller is not in the READY mode.  
Reset the controller.  
The controller is in the constant-value opera-  
tion mode.  
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
Key lock is enabled.  
The program No. does not change by pressing  
in the basic display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
Program selection by external switch input not  
0
Set all external switch inputs RSW8 to 12 OFF.  
The controller is not in the READY mode.  
Reset the controller.  
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.  
The controller is in the constant-value opera-  
tion mode.  
DISP  
Press  
.
Entry changeable display state by  
in MANUAL mode  
Key lock is enabled.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
RUN/HOLD  
The controller does not change to RUN mode by pressing  
in the basic display  
state  
Cause  
Remedy  
Select an already set up program.  
The currently selected program in READY  
mode has not been set up.  
The controller is in the END mode.  
Key lock is enabled.  
Reset the controller to READY mode.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
RUN/HOLD  
The controller does not change to HOLD mode by pressing  
in the basic dis-  
play state  
Cause  
Remedy  
The controller is in the READY or FAST mode. RUN mode is entered from READY or FAST mode. Press  
RUN/HOLD key again.  
RUN/HOLD  
Reset the controller to READY mode, and press  
twice.  
The controller is in the END mode.  
The controller is in the constant-value opera-  
tion mode.  
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.  
Key lock is enabled.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
PROG  
RUN/HOLD  
The controller cannot be reset by pressing  
+
in the basic display state  
Reset in the program operation moderefers to switching to the READY mode and  
returning to the No.1 segment.  
Reset in the constant-value moderefers to switching to the READY mode.  
Cause  
Remedy  
RUN/HOLD  
The controller is in the READY mode.  
Press  
to set the controller to the RUN mode. (The  
controller can be reset in case of external switch input or  
communications even in the READY mode.)  
Key lock is enabled.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
PROG  
DISP  
The program is not advanced by pressing  
+
in the basic display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
RUN/HOLD  
The controller is in the READY mode.  
Press  
to set the controller to the RUN mode. (The  
controller can be reset in case of external switch input  
or communications even in the READY mode.)  
PROG  
RUN/HOLD  
Press  
+
to set the controller to the READY  
The controller is in the END mode.  
RUN/HOLD  
mode, and press  
RUN mode.  
again to set the controller to the  
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.  
The controller is in the constant-value opera-  
tion mode.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
Key lock is enabled.  
FUNC  
The controller does not change to FAST mode by pressing  
+
in the basic  
display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
to set the controller to the RUN mode. (The  
RUN/HOLD  
The controller is in the READY mode.  
Press  
controller can be reset in case of external switch input  
or communications even in the READY mode.)  
PROG  
RUN/HOLD  
Press  
+
to set the controller to the READY  
The controller is in the END mode.  
RUN/HOLD  
mode, and press  
RUN mode.  
again to set the controller to the  
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.  
The controller is in the constant-value opera-  
tion mode.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
Key lock is enabled.  
A/M  
The controller does not change to MANUAL mode by pressing  
in the basic  
display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
ON-OFF control is being carried out by 0D  
and 6D outputs.  
Set PID set P setting in use to other than 0.0 and switch  
to PID control from ON-OFF control.  
3-position-proportional control is selected by  
3D output.  
Set setup data C 4 5 setting to 0 and switch to PID  
control from 3-position-proportional control.  
Key lock is enabled.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
A/M  
The controller does not change to AUTO mode by pressing  
in the basic dis-  
play state  
Cause  
Key lock is enabled.  
Remedy  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
AT  
Auto-tuning (AT) is not started by pressing  
in the basic display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
RUN/HOLD  
A/M  
The controller is in the READY mode.  
The controller is in the MANUAL mode.  
Input 1 over-range  
Press  
Press  
to set the controller to the RUN mode.  
to set the controller to the AUTO mode.  
Correctly wire input 1 to correct input state.  
Set variable parameter A T setting to other than 0.  
Set setup data C 1 8 setting to 0.  
Controller set not to execute AT.  
The controller is set to programmer functions  
by 5G output.  
This is a heat/cool model.  
Key lock is enabled.  
AT cannot be executed by 3D and 5K outputs.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
AT  
Auto-tuning (AT) is not canceled by pressing  
in the basic display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
Key lock is enabled.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.  
PARA  
Setting group other than “P A R A” is not displayed by pressing  
by selecting  
the setting group in parameter set state  
Cause  
Key lock is enabled.  
Remedy  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0, 1 or 3.  
PARA  
Setting group other than “S E T” is not displayed by pressing  
by selecting the  
setting group in parameter set state  
Cause  
Key lock is enabled.  
Remedy  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 or 3.  
ENT  
The controller does not enter the setting entry state by pressing  
in the param-  
eter setup state  
Cause  
Remedy  
“– – – ” is displayed on the lower display.  
This cannot be displayed nor set. This item sometimes  
can be displayed or set by changing the setting of  
related items.  
This is a display-only item.  
Unchangeable data is displayed on the lower  
display.  
The controller does not change to setup group selection state and setting entry  
PARA  
state continues by pressing  
in parameter setting entry state  
Cause  
Remedy  
PARA  
DISP  
The controller displays items by  
ment.  
assign- Press  
to return the controller to the basic display  
FUNC  
PARA  
state, and press  
+
.
FUNC  
PROG  
The controller does not change to program setup state by pressing  
+
in  
the basic display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
The controller is in the constant-value opera-  
tion mode.  
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.  
Key lock is enabled.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0, 1 or 3.  
ENT  
The controller does not change to the setting entry state by pressing  
in the  
basic display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
The program setup cannot be changed.  
Set program parameter P R T C setting to 0.  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
Items cannot be changed by pressing  
in program setup state  
Cause  
Remedy  
The pattern item has not been set.  
Set SP and time data.  
Programming items are set to display OFF.  
All setup data C 6 8 to C 7 1 settings are 1. Set  
necessary items to 0.  
Event items cannot be displayed by repeatedly pressing  
in program setup  
state  
Cause  
Remedy  
Event type is controller status event.  
Set event type (E T 1, E T 2, E T 3) in event configura-  
tion date to one of 0 to 11 or 50.  
Set setup data C 6 8 setting to 0.  
Programming items are set to display OFF.  
Time events cannot be displayed by repeatedly pressing  
in program setup  
state  
Cause  
Remedy  
Change event configuration data T T setting and assign  
Time event is assigned to segment No. event.  
to time event.  
Select a mode that supports time events (option).  
This model does not support time events.  
Set setup data C 6 q setting to 0.  
Programming items are set to display OFF.  
PID set items cannot be displayed by repeatedly pressing  
in program setup  
state  
Cause  
Remedy  
PID set auto-switching is set to ON.  
Set setup data C 1 1 setting to 0.  
The controller is set to programmer function  
by 5G output.  
Set setup data C 1 8 setting to 0.  
3-position control is selected by 3D output.  
Set setup data C 4 5 setting in use to 0 and switch to  
PID control from 3-position control.  
Programming items are set to display OFF.  
Set setup data C 7 0 setting to 0.  
G.Soak items cannot be displayed by repeatedly pressing  
in program setup  
state  
Cause  
Remedy  
Set setup data C 7 0 setting to 0.  
Programming items are set to display OFF.  
PV start items, cycle items and pattern link items cannot be displayed by repeat-  
edly pressing in program setup state  
Cause  
Programming items are set to display OFF.  
Remedy  
Set setup data C 7 1 setting to 0.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
ENT  
FUNC  
Insertion/deletion of segments cannot be confirmed by pressing  
+
in pro-  
gram setup state  
Cause  
Remedy  
The program setup cannot be changed.  
Set program parameter P R T C setting to 0.  
The program being set up is being operated  
(RUN. HOLD, FAST, END).  
Reset the controller.  
Not pattern item on programming map  
Move to pattern item on programming map.  
Pattern item of non-set segment on program-  
ming map  
Either move to already set up segment, or set up  
segment.  
FUNC  
CLR  
Program deletion cannot be confirmed by pressing  
+
while entering pat-  
tern items in program setup state  
Cause  
Remedy  
The program being set up is being operated  
(RUN. HOLD, FAST, END).  
Reset the controller.  
PROG  
The program cannot be copied by pressing  
+
in the basic display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
Reset the controller.  
The mode is not the READY mode.  
The program of the currently selected pro-  
gram No. is not set up.  
Select a program No. whose program is already set.  
The controller is in the constant-value opera-  
tion mode.  
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.  
The program is protected.  
Key lock is enabled.  
Set variable parameter P R T C setting to 0.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0, 1 or 3.  
FUNC  
CLR  
DISP  
General reset is not applied by pressing  
+
+
in the basic display state  
Cause  
Remedy  
The mode is not the READY mode.  
The mode is the MANUAL mode.  
Program is protected.  
Reset the controller.  
Execute auto operation.  
Set variable parameter P R T C setting to 0.  
Key lock is enabled.  
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0.  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
9-3 Motor Adjustment is Impossible  
There are two ways of wiring a motor to the DCP301: wiring for direct motor rotation and wiring for reverse motor  
rotation. When wired for direct motor rotation, the motor rotates in clockwise (CW ) direction when DCP301  
output increases. There are two ways of making the motor rotate in the reverse direction (counterclockwise: CCW)  
depending on your control requirements (e.g. cooling control):  
By switching the control operating direction on the DCP301 with the motor wired to the DCP301 for direct  
motor rotation as it is, or  
By wiring the motor to the DCP301 for reverse motor rotation.  
The control operating direction (direct/reverse) can be switched on this controller. If the motor is wired to the control-  
ler for direct motor rotation, the DCP301 can be easily set up for control in either direction. This makes it easier to  
remedy trouble that may occur during controller operation. For this reason, we recommend wiring the motor to the  
DCP301 for direct motor operation.  
Wiring for direct motor rotation  
DCP301  
Wiring for reverse motor rotation  
DCP301  
11 12 13 14 15 16  
11 12 13 14 15 16  
24Vac  
24Vac  
~
~
2
3
1
Y
T
G
2
3
1
Y
T
G
CW open CCW closed  
CW open CCW closed  
Motor  
CW open CCW closed  
CW open CCW closed  
Motor  
CW:  
Clock Wise (  
)
CCW: Counter Clock Wise (  
)
The DCP301 is also provided with a function (A L 1 0 to A L 1 2) for detecting MFB disconnection or short-circuit if  
the motor has been wired to the controller in the wrong way.  
By this function, the DCP301 judges reverse direction wiring in the same way as direct direction wiring, and does not  
generate an alarm. If the setting of variable parameter M .-C is left at the factory setting (0), motor operation is  
continued.  
The following tables summarize the phenomena that occur according to how the motor and DCP301 are wired when  
the motor is automatically adjusted (variable parameter M .-A T setting 1 is input). Motor rotation is started from the  
fully closed position (motor is turned as far as possible CCW).  
The values displayed in the lower display in the tables are only examples. Alarms are displayed after the motor fully  
closes or fully opens.  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
Normal wiring for direct motor rotation  
Upper Display  
Lit LEDs  
Lower Display  
Motor Action  
Remarks  
Readout decreases  
from 1000 to 500 and  
stabilizes.  
Readout increases  
from 500 to 9500 and  
stabilizes.  
If the motor rotates CCW  
when OT2 lights, motor  
terminals 1 and 2 are  
wired for direct rotation.  
C A .C L  
OT2  
CCW  
C A .O P  
OT1  
CW  
Normal wiring for reverse motor rotation  
Upper Display  
Lit LEDs  
Lower Display  
Motor Action  
Remarks  
Readout decreases  
from 9000 to 500 and  
stabilizes.  
Readout increases  
from 500 to 9500 and  
stabilizes.  
If the motor rotates CW  
when 12 and G Y  
are reversed and OT2  
lights, motor terminals 1  
and 2 are wired for  
C A .C L  
OT2  
CW  
C A .O P  
OT1  
CCW  
reverse rotation.  
Alarm display caused by wrong wiring and causes  
Upper Display Lit LEDs  
Lower Display  
Motor Action Alarm Display  
Cause  
GY  
Display increases and  
stabilizes.  
Display decreases and  
stabilizes.  
C A .C L  
C A .O P  
OT2  
OT1  
CCW  
CW  
A L 1 2  
reversed  
Display decreases and  
stabilizes.  
Display stabilizes at  
9999.  
TG  
reversed  
C A .C L  
C A .O P  
OT2  
OT1  
CCW  
CW  
A L 1 2  
Display stabilizes at  
9999.  
TY  
reversed  
C A .C L  
OT2  
CCW  
A L 1 1  
A L 1 2  
Display increases and  
stabilizes.  
Display decreases and  
stabilizes.  
12  
reversed  
C A .C L  
C A .O P  
OT2  
OT1  
CW  
A L 1 2  
CCW  
Display stabilizes at  
9999.  
12  
reversed,  
C A .C L  
OT2  
CW  
A L 1 1  
A L 1 2  
TG  
reversed  
Display decreases and  
stabilizes.  
Display stabilizes at  
9999.  
12  
reversed,  
TY  
reversed  
C A .C L  
C A .O P  
OT2  
OT1  
CW  
A L 1 2  
CCW  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
9-4 Replacing the Battery  
CAUTION  
Before replacing the battery, be sure to turn the power OFF. Failure to do  
so might cause electric shock.  
Do not touch internal components immediately after turning the power OFF  
to replace the battery. Doing so might cause burns.  
• Do not insert the battery with the polarities (+,-) reversed.  
• Do not use damaged (broken battery skin, leaking battery fluid) batteries.  
• Do not throw batteries into fires, or charge, short-circuit, disassemble or  
heat batteries.  
• Store batteries in low-temperature, dry locations.  
Failure to observe the above cautions may cause batteries to emit heat or  
split, or battery fluid to lead.  
Store batteries out of the reach of small children.  
Batteries are small and are easy to swallow. If a child swallows a battery,  
consult a physician immediately.  
Return used batteries to Honeywell sales/service office or your dealer. When  
disposing of used batteries at the user site, observe local bylaws.  
Handling Precautions  
• Before handling components inside the controller, touch a grounded metal part  
to remove any static electricity from the body. Static electricity may cause dam-  
age to controller components.  
• Batteries left in storage for a long time discharge electricity, reducing their ser-  
vice life. Purchase new batteries as required.  
The parameter setups and program setups on the DCP301 are stored to battery backed up memory (RAM). So, stored  
setups are held in memory even if the controller is turned OFF.  
However, when battery voltage becomes low, stored setups are no longer held in memory when the controller is  
turned OFF.  
BAT LED blinking  
When low battery voltage is detected, the BAT LED on the console blinks. The voltage  
level for detection of low battery voltage is set higher than the required voltage level for  
holding stored setups in memory.  
Accordingly, as soon as the BAT LED starts blinking, stored setups can still be held in  
memory. However, if the controller is turned back ON after being left for a long time and  
the BAT LED blinks, setups stored to memory may be damaged.  
Items to prepare  
Phillips head screwdriver  
New lithium battery:  
Model No. 81446431-001  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
Replacement procedure  
Handling Precautions  
Replace with the lithium battery set (model No.: 81446431-001). The lithium  
battery set can be ordered from Yamatake Corporation.  
When removing or mounting the RAM board or battery connectors, do not use  
metallic tools. Doing so might short-circuit electrical circuits.  
While the battery is removed for battery replacement, the capacitor on the RAM  
board backs up the contents of memory.  
As this capacitor is charged, make sure that the controller is left ON for at least  
1h before replacing the battery. Insert the new battery on the RAM board within  
24h of turning the controller OFF.  
When the BAT LED starts blinking, follow the procedure below to replace the battery.  
(1) Leave the controller turned ON for at least 1h.  
(2) Turn the power OFF.  
ENT  
(3) Remove the key cover from the console, and fully loosen the lock screw under  
a Phillips screwdriver.  
with  
>> The body comes out towards you.  
Comes out towards you.  
Lock screw  
Key cover  
(4) Before handling components inside the controller, touch a grounded metal part to  
remove any static electricity from the body.  
(5) Pull the body out towards you to remove from the case.  
>> You should be able to see the button-shaped battery on the left facing the body.  
Battery  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
(6) Place the body on its save on a desk or flat surface so that the side on which the  
battery is installed is facing up.  
(7) Remove the battery from its gray holder.  
(8) Remove the RAM board (approx. 3cm x 8cm) with the battery still connected to the  
board.  
The RAM board is connected to the base board by two connectors.  
Handling Precautions  
When placing the RAM board on the desk, make sure that the solder surface of  
the board is face down. If the component mounting surface is placed face down,  
the components may become damaged.  
Connector  
RAM board  
(approx. 3cm x 8cm)  
Connector  
(9) Remove the battery connector from the RAM board.  
Connector  
(
(
10) Connect the connector of the new battery to the RAM board making sure that it is  
inserted the correct direction.  
11) Mount the RAM Board making sure that it is mounted in the correct direction. Do  
not insert the battery cable under the RAM board.  
OK  
No good  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
(
12) Fit the battery into the gray holder so that the battery cable is above the RAM board.  
Gray holder  
(
13) Insert the body into the case.  
Do not exert excessive force if the body cannot easily fit into the case. Also, make  
sure that the boards mounted on the body are not loose or twisted.  
(
(
14) Tighten the lock screw while slightly pushing in the controllers console. Take care  
not to overtighten the screw.  
15) Turn the controller ON, and make sure that the BAT LED is out.  
The following serves as a general guideline for when to replace the battery:  
Note  
About 3 years when using the controller under standard operating conditions (operat-  
ing temperature: 23±2°C) with the controller ON  
About 10 years when using the controller under standard operating conditions (operat-  
ing temperature: 23±2°C) with the controller OFF  
Using the controller in a higher operating temperature will shorten its service life.  
Setups are held in memory even if the BAT LED is blinking.  
The controller operates in one of two ways when memory contents are damaged.  
(1) G .R E Sis displayed when the controller is turned ON and regular operation is  
not started.  
ENT  
(If this happens, press  
to execute a general reset. This restores parameter set-  
ups to factory settings and clears the program setup.)  
(2) Regular operation is started when the controller is turned ON, and one or both of  
alarm codes A L q 6 and/or A L q 7 is displayed.  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
10-1 Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
Program Number of programs  
Number of segments  
Segment setting system  
Segment time  
Basic time accuracy  
Events (3)  
19  
30 per program  
RAMP-X system: Set by set points (SP) and time.  
0 to 99h 59min, or 0 to 99min 59s (time unit selectable)  
±0.01% (0.1s delay when segment time setting=0)  
Set operating point.  
Time events (5)  
PID set No.  
Set ON and OFF times.  
Set 0 to 8 (Set 0 for continuation of previous segment) (Set 0 to 4 on heat/cool models.)  
Sets G.Soak width 0 to 1000U.  
G.Soak  
PV start  
Sets program ON/OFF.  
Cycle  
Sets program count 0 to 9999.  
Pattern link  
Sets program No.0 to 19 (0: no link)  
Tag  
Sets 8 alphanumerics for each program (not displayed on controller)  
Thermocouple, resistance temperature detector, dc voltage, dc current multi-range  
(See pages 2-8 and 2-9.)  
Input  
Input type  
Input readout accuracy  
±0.1%FS±1U (varies according to standard conditions, display value conversion and  
range)  
• At -100°C max. of K and T thermocouples: ±1°C1U  
• At 260°C max. of B thermocouple:  
At 260 to 800°C:  
At 800 to 1800°C:  
±4%FS±1U  
±0.4%FS±1U  
±0.2%FS±1U  
• At 100°C max. of R and S thermocouples: ±0.2%FS±1U  
At 100 to 1600°C: ±0.15%FS±1U  
• At 300°C max. of PR40-20 thermocouple: ±2.5%FS±1U  
At 300 to 800°C:  
At 800 to 1900°C:  
• Golden iron chromel thermocouple:  
±1.5%FS±1U  
±0.5%FS±1U  
±1.5K±1U  
• 2-digit range past decimal point by resistance thermometer detector input:  
±0.15%±1U  
• At 0 to 10mV range:  
±0.15%FS±1U  
• At -100°C max. of DIN U thermocouple:  
±2°C±1U  
At -100 to 0°C:  
±1°C±1U  
• At -100°C max. of DIN L thermocouple: ±1.5°C±1U  
0.1s  
Input sampling cycle  
Input bias current  
Thermocouple, dc voltage input: ±1.3µA max. (at peak value, under standard conditions)  
At 1V min. range: 3µA max.  
Input impedance  
Measuring current  
Influence of wiring resis-  
tance  
dc current input:  
50Ω ±10% (under operating conditions)  
RTD input: 1.04mA ±0.02mA, current flow from terminal A (under operating conditions)  
Thermocouple,  
Changes in readout value at wiring resistance of 250at both  
ends are as follows by input conversion:  
dc voltage input:  
• 0 to 10mV, -10 to 10mV: Within 35µV  
• 0 to 100mV:  
Within 60µV  
• Other:  
Within 750µV  
RTD input:  
±0.01%FS max. in wiring resistance range 0 to 10Ω  
Range of F01, F33, F38, P01, P33 and P38: ±0.02%FS/max.  
Allowable wiring resistance is 85max. (including Zener barrier  
resistance. When Zener barrier is used, this applies only to  
ranges other than F01, F33, F38, P01, P33 and P38. Note that  
site adjustment is required.)  
Allowable parallel resistance Thermocouple disconnection detection allowable parallel resistance: 1Mmin.  
Max. allowable input  
Thermocouple, dc voltage input: -5 to +15Vdc  
dc current input: 50mAdc, 2.5Vdc  
Burnout  
Upscale and downscale can be internally selected. (dc current input and dc voltage  
input of 1V or more are only downscaled.)  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
Item  
Specification  
110%FS min.: Upscaled  
Input  
Over-range detection  
threshold  
-10%FS max.: Downscaled (Note that F50 range is not downscaled. Lower readout  
limit of B18 range is 20°C, 68°F.)  
Cold junction compensa-  
tion accuracy  
±0.5°C (under standard conditions)  
Influence of surrounding  
temperature on cold  
junction compensation  
Cold junction compensa-  
tion system  
±0.2°C (at 0 to 50°C range)  
Internal/external (0°C only) compensation selectable  
Scaling  
-1999 to 9999U (settable at dc voltage and dc current ranges. Reverse scaling and  
decimal point repositioning possible)  
Square root extraction  
Linearization table approximation  
Input bias  
Dropout 0.1 to 10.0%, Possible by dc current and voltage ranges  
12 (both line ends fixed, 11 points variable)  
-1000 to 1000U variable  
Digital filter  
0.0 to 120.0s variable (filter OFF at 0.0)  
Number of inputs  
Types of connectable  
outputs  
12  
External  
Switch  
(RSW)  
Input  
Dry contacts (relay contact) and open-collector (current sink to ground)  
Terminal voltage (open)  
10.4 to 12.6V (under operating conditions) across common terminal (terminal 25 ) and  
each input terminal  
Terminal current (short-  
circuit)  
5.0 to 6.6mA across each terminal (under operating conditions)  
Allowable contact resistance  
(dry contact)  
ON: 700max. (under operating conditions)  
OFF: 10kmin. (under operating conditions)  
3V max. (under operating conditions)  
Residual current (allowable  
open-collector ON)  
Leakage current (allowable  
open-collector OFF)  
Parallel connection to  
other instruments  
0.1mA max. (under operating conditions)  
Can be connected to DCP301/302 series.  
Assignments (fixed)  
Assignments (variable)  
Input sampling cycle  
ON detection min. hold time  
Upper display  
RUN, HOLD, RESET, ADV, program No.  
FAST, PV start, AT, AUTO/MANUAL, G.Soak cancel, reverse/direct action  
0.1s  
0.2s (program No. 0.4s)  
Green 4-digit, 7-segment LED  
Indication  
/Program-  
mer  
This normally displays PV values. Item codes are displayed in parameter setup.  
Orange 4-digit, 7-segment LED  
Lower display  
This normally displays SP values. Setting values are displayed in parameter setup.  
Green 2-digit, 7-segment LED  
Program No. display  
Segment No. display  
This normally displays program No.  
Green 2-digit, 7-segment LED  
This normally displays segment No. Item Nos. are displayed in parameter setup, and  
alarm No. is displayed when alarm occurs.  
6 orange LEDs  
Profile display  
Status displays  
Displays program pattern rise, soak and fall tendencies.  
22 round LEDs  
Modes:  
RUN, HLD, MAN, PRG (green)  
Display details: PV, SP, OUT, TM, CYC (green)  
Battery voltage: BAT (red) (blinks at low voltage)  
Status:  
AT, OT1, OT2, OT3 (orange)  
Events:  
EV1, EV2, EV3, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 (orange)  
Operation keys  
13 rubber keys  
Loader connector port  
1 (dedicated cable with stereo miniplugs)  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
Item  
Specification  
READY:  
RUN:  
Ready to run program (control stop/program No. selectable)  
Mode  
Program operation mode  
Program run  
HOLD:  
FAST:  
END:  
Program hold  
Program fast-forward  
Program end  
AUTO:  
Automatic operation  
MANUAL: Manual operation (output controlled on console)  
Constant-value operation  
mode  
READY:  
RUN:  
Ready to run program (control stop)  
Program run  
AUTO:  
Automatic operation  
MANUAL: Manual operation (output controlled on console)  
PID control  
Control  
Proportional band (P)  
0.0 to 999.9% (0D, 6D output), ON-OFF control by 0.0  
0.1 to 999.9% (2G, 5G, 3D, 5K output)  
0 to 3600s, PD control by 0  
Rate time (I)  
Reset time (D)  
MV limit  
0 to 1200s, PI control by 0  
Lower limit:  
-10.0 to upper limit %  
Upper limit: Lower limit to 110.0%  
0.0 to 100.0%  
Manual reset  
Number of PID sets  
8 sets for program operation + 1 set for constant-value  
operation  
PID set selection  
Segment designation/automatic zone selection can be  
switched by program operation  
MV change limit  
Auto-tuning  
0.0 to 10.0%/0.01s, no limit by 0.0  
Automatic setting of PID value by limit cycle system +  
Neuro & Fuzzy (2 degrees of freedom PID) and Smart  
systems (executable by 0D, 2G, 5G and 6D outputs)  
ON-OFF control differential 0 to 1000U (settable by 0D and 6D outputs)  
Position-proportional dead 0.5 to 25.0% (settable by 2G output)  
zone  
Heat/cool dead zone  
Deviation lower limit  
Deviation upper limit  
Deviation lower limit  
hysteresis  
-100.0 to 50.0% (settable by 3D and 5K outputs)  
0 to 1000U (settable when 3-position control is selected  
by 3D output)  
3-position control  
Deviation upper limit  
hysteresis  
Reverse/direct action  
switching  
Switchable  
(0D, 2G, 5G, 6D outputs)  
Programmer function  
Switching  
MV output can be switched to SP output (5G output).  
Scaling  
Supported  
1/10000  
Output resolution  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
Item  
Specification  
Control  
Output  
Auxiliary output  
Type  
PV, SP, deviation, MV, MFB  
Scaling  
Supported  
Output resolution  
Relay contact  
output  
1/10000  
0D output 1  
Contact type:  
Contact rating:  
1a1b  
3D outputs 1, 2  
5A (30Vdc, resistive load)  
5A (120Vac, resistive load)  
4A (240Vdc, resistive load)  
Allowable contact voltage:250Vac, resistive load  
125Vdc, resistive load  
Max. switching power:  
150W, resistive load  
960VA, resistive load  
Life:  
100,000 operations  
(resistive load at contact rating, frequency:  
30 operations/minute)  
Min. switching voltage:  
Min. switching current:  
Output resolution:  
5V  
100mA  
1/1000  
Time-proportional cycle: 5 to 120s  
2G output 1  
M/M drive relay  
Contact type:  
1a (2 circuits)  
Contact rating:  
2.5A (30Vdc, L/R=0.7ms)  
4A (120Vac, cosø=0.4)  
2A (240Vac, cosø=0.4)  
Allowable contact voltage:250Vac, cosø=0.4  
125Vdc, L/R=0.7ms  
Max. switching power:  
Life:  
75W (L/R=0.7ms)  
480VA (cosø=0.4)  
100,000 operations  
(cosø=0.4 at contact rating, frequency: 30  
operations/minute)  
5V  
Min. switching voltage:  
Min. switching current:  
100mA  
MFB (motor feedback) input range:  
100 to 2500Ω  
Control at MFB (motor feedback) disconnection:  
ON/OFF for continuation of operation  
according to MFB estimated position can  
be selected.  
5G output 1  
Current output  
(4 to 20mA)  
Output current:  
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc  
5K outputs 1, 2  
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2  
Allowable load resistance:600max. (under operating conditions)  
Output accuracy:  
±0.1%FS max. (under standard condi-  
tions)  
±0.5%FS at output 5% or less of 0 to  
20mA output  
Output resolution:  
1/10000  
Inrush current:  
25mA max. for 50ms max. (at 250load)  
Max. output current:  
Min. output current:  
Output updating cycle:  
Open terminal voltage:  
22.0mAdc  
0.0mAdc  
0.1s  
25V max. (output 1)  
18V max. (output 2, auxiliary outputs 1, 2)  
Allowable load resistance:600max. (under operating conditions)  
Inrush current: 25mA max. for 50ms max. (at 250load)  
Load current adjustment: 2 to 22mA variable  
6D output 1  
Voltage output  
5K outputs 1, 2  
(when current output  
is switched to  
Open terminal voltage:  
25V max. (output 2 of 5K output)  
voltage output)  
18V max. (output 2 of 5K output)  
OFF leakage current:  
Output response time:  
100µA max.  
At ON-OFF 600load: 0.5ms max.  
At OFF-ON 600load: 1.0ms max.  
1/1000  
Output resolution:  
Time-proportional cycle: 1 to 60s variable  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
Item  
Specification  
Event/  
Time  
Event  
Output  
Events 1, 2  
Relay contact  
output  
Contact type:  
Contact rating:  
Life:  
1a  
1A (240Vac/30Vdc, resistive load)  
100,000 operations (at rating)  
Min. switching voltage, current:  
10V, 10mA  
1a1b  
Event 3  
Relay contact  
output  
Contact type:  
Contact rating:  
Life:  
2A (240Vac/30Vdc, resistive load)  
100,000 operations (at rating)  
Min. switching voltage, current:  
10V, 10mA  
External supply voltage: 10 to 29Vdc  
Time events 1 to 5  
Open-collector  
output  
Max. load current:  
OFF leakage current:  
ON residual voltage:  
PV type events:  
70mA/load  
0.1mA  
1.6V max.  
Event 1 to 3 settings  
Event type  
PV, deviation, absolute value  
deviation, SP, MV, MFB  
Controller status events: RUN+HOLD+FAST+END, READY,  
RUN, HOLD, FAST, END, G.Soak  
standby, MANUAL, auto-tuning  
executing, constant-value operation,  
MFB estimated position control, sum  
of all alarms, PV range alarm,  
controller alarms, low battery voltage,  
setting on console, ADV  
Time events  
ON/OFF selectable  
Event standby  
0 to 200U (event types PV, deviation, absolute value deviation  
or SP)  
Event hysteresis  
0.0 to 20.0% (event types MV or MFB)  
0 to 3600s  
Event ON delay  
Time events, segment No. events  
RS-485  
Time event 1 to 5 settings Time event type  
Commu- Communications system  
nications  
Communications  
standard  
Multidrop (DCP301 provided with only slave node functionality)  
1 to 31 units max.  
Network  
Half duplex  
Data flow  
Start-stop synchronization  
Balanced (differential)  
Synchronization  
Transmission  
system  
Interface system  
Bit serial  
Data line  
5 transmit/receive lines (3-wire connection also possible)  
4800, 9600bps  
Signal line  
Transmission speed  
Transmission  
distance  
500m max. (total)  
Conforming to RS-485  
Other  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
Item  
Specification  
Display characters  
11bits/character  
Char. bit count  
Format  
1 start bit, even parity, 1 stop bit; or 1 start bit, no parity, and 2 stop  
bits  
8bits  
Data length  
Isolation  
All inputs and outputs are completely isolated.  
RS-485 communications can be performed by connecting to a computer equipped with an RS-485 interface.  
Memory backup  
Memory  
Battery life  
Battery backed-up RAM  
Controller power OFF Approx. 3 years under standard conditions  
General  
Specifica-  
tions  
Controller power ON  
Approx. 10 years under standard conditions  
Rated power voltage  
Power consumption  
Power ON rush current  
90 to 264Vac, 50/60Hz  
30VA max.  
15A max., 10ms (under operating conditions)  
Handling Precautions  
When starting up a number of DCP31s simultaneously, ensure ample power is supplied  
or stagger startup times. Otherwise, the controllers may not start normally due to inrush  
current induced-voltage drop. Voltage must stabilize within 2s after power ON.  
Reset time:  
15s max. (time until normal operation possible under normal operating  
conditions)  
Power ON operation  
20ms max. (under operating conditions)  
Allowable transient power  
loss  
Min. 20Macross power terminal (1) or (2) and ground terminal (3) (using a 500Vac  
megger)  
Insulation resistance  
1500Vac 50/60Hz for 1min across power terminal and ground terminal  
1500Vac 50/60Hz for 1min across relay output and ground terminal  
500Vac 50/60Hz for 1min across non-power terminal and ground terminal  
500Vac 50/60Hz for 1min across isolated terminals  
Dielectric strength  
Standard conditions  
Ambient temperature  
Ambient humidity  
Rated power voltage  
Power frequency  
Vibration resistance  
Impact resistance  
Mounting angle  
23 2°C  
60 5%RH  
105Vac 1%  
50 1Hz or 60 1Hz  
0m/s2  
0m/s2  
Reference plane (vertical) 3°  
2000m max.  
Altitude  
Operating conditions  
Ambient temperature  
range  
0 to 50°C (temperature at case bottom when closely mounted)  
10 to 90%RH (no condensation)  
90 to 264Vac  
Ambient humidity range  
Rated power voltage  
Power frequency  
Vibration resistance  
Impact resistance  
Mounting angle  
50 2Hz or 60 2Hz  
0 to 1.96m/s2  
0 to 9.80m/s2  
Reference plane (vertical) 10°  
Permanently connected type controller, indoor installation, panel-mounted  
EN61010-1, EN50081-2, EN50082-2 (CE statement), EN61326  
Category II (IEC664-1, EN61010-1)  
Installation mode  
Applicable standards  
Installation category  
Pollution degree  
2
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
Item  
Specification  
Transport/storage  
Specifica- conditions  
tions  
Ambient temperature  
range  
Ambient humidity range 10 to 95%RH (no condensation)  
-20 to +70°C  
General  
0 to 4.90m/s2 (10 to 60 Hz for 2h each in X, Y and Z direc-  
Vibration resistance  
tions)  
Impact resistance  
Package drop test  
Rated  
0 to 490m/s2 (3 times vertically)  
Drop height: 60cm (1 angle, 3 edges and 6 planes; free fall)  
IEC127  
Fuse  
Cutoff speed  
Delayed operation type (T)  
Rated voltage  
Rated current  
250V  
1A  
M3.5 self-tapping screw  
0.78 to 0.98N•m  
Terminal screw  
Terminal screws tightening  
torque  
Mask: Multilon  
Case: Polycarbonate  
Case: Light gray (Munsell 2.5Y7.5/1)  
Mask/case materials  
Mask/case color  
Installation  
Mask: Dark gray (Munsell 5Y3.5/1)  
Specially designed mounting bracket  
Approx. 900g  
Mass  
I Accessories/option list  
Item  
Model No.  
Q’ty  
Standard accessories Unit indicating label  
Mounting bracket  
N-3132  
81405411-001  
EN1I-6197  
1
1 set (2 brackets)  
1
User’s Manual  
Options  
(sold separately)  
Hard dust-proof cover set  
Soft dust-proof cover set  
Terminal cover set  
81446083-001  
81446087-001  
81446084-001  
81446431-001  
Lithium battery set  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
10-2 External Dimensions  
Unit: mm  
(18)  
15  
159.5  
137  
96  
A
B
A
B
A-A  
B-B  
37  
78.4  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS  
I Soft dust-proof cover set (sold separately)  
Unit: mm  
(transparent silicon rubber)  
Model No.: 81446087-001  
98  
15.5  
12.5  
2.7  
86  
I Hard dust-proof cover set (sold separately)  
(transparent polycarbonate)  
Model No.: 81446083-001  
Packing  
16  
6
4
106  
8
96.6  
4.7  
I Terminal cover set (sold separately)  
(gray non-flammable, heat-resistant PVC)  
Model No.: 81446084-001  
Can be attached to either of  
90  
standard or add-on terminal base.  
5-3.6 hole  
45  
17  
R1.8  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
This chapter covers the field calibrations procedures for the inputs, outputs and various functions of the DCP301 and  
DCP302 controller after shipment from the factory. When calibration is made in the field, the original factory data is  
erased, and so the specified input/output accuracies of the controller cannot be assured. This manual is for users who  
are conversant with DCP301 and DCP302 use and operation.  
Precautions before calibration  
Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 2 hours before you calibrate the  
DCP301 and DCP302. Confirm that the test equipment needed for calibration has stabi-  
lized.  
Factory calibration has been made at a stable temperature of 23.0°C (±2°C). Calibrate  
the DCP301 and DCP302 in this range, and where there are no significant fluctuations in  
air temperature.  
If calibration equipment of a lower grade than specified below is used, calibration  
results may be unsatisfactory.  
Equipment needed  
(1) Standard input source with ±0.02% accuracy (having more than 5 effective digits  
and capable of generating both voltage and current outputs)  
(2) Decade resistance box with ±0.02% accuracy (having a range of 10 to 500with a  
resolution of more than 0.01)  
(3) Digital ammeter with ±0.02% accuracy (measurable in the range of 4 to 20mA with  
assured resolution of more than 0.01mA)  
(4) Thermometer with ±0.1°C accuracy (resolution of more than 0.1°C)  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
11-1 Quick Reference Table for Calibration Items  
DCP301 and DCP302 controllers are numbered using the following format. Format items may require different cal-  
ibration procedures, as shown in Table 11-1.  
Model number: DCP30 * * * * ES * * *  
(1) Basic Model Number  
(2) Output Number  
(3) PV Input Number  
(4) Option1 Number  
(5) Option2 Number  
Table 11-1. Calibration Items for Each Model  
Output and Option Model Number  
Output:5G, 6D  
Option1:00 Option1:01 Option1:02 Option1:00 Option1:01 Option1:02 Option1:00 Option1:01 Option1:00 Option1:01  
Basic  
Model:  
DCP301  
Model  
Option2:  
1, 2  
Output:0D  
Output:2G, 3D  
Output:5K  
Calibration  
& Test Item  
Key Test  
0 Function  
Test  
Indicator Test  
DI Test(1 to 4)  
DI Test(5 to 12)  
DO Control Output Ch1 Test  
DO Control Output Ch2 Test  
DO Control Output Ch3 Test  
DO Test(1 to 3:Event)  
DO Test(4 to 8:Time Event)  
Gain No.0 to 12  
1 PV Input  
Calibration  
Gain No.16 to 20  
2 CJ Sensor  
Calibration  
4 Current  
Output  
Output Ch1  
Output Ch2  
Output Ch3  
Calibration  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
Table 11-2. Item and Sub Item Table for Calibration  
Item  
Sub Item  
Description  
Item change code  
Key test  
Upper Display Shows  
Lower Display Shows  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0.0.0.0.etc.  
AdJS  
Display test  
Digital input test  
Output test (control)  
Output test (digital output)  
1
2
0
1
2
3
Item change code  
Gain No.  
PV input 0%  
PV input 100%  
1.0.1.1.  
2.0.2.2.  
Item change code  
CJ input 0%  
CJ count  
AdJS  
Previous adjustment  
value  
0
1
2
3
CJ temperature  
Item change code  
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
4.0.4.4.  
AdJS  
OUT ch1 4mA output  
OUT ch1 20mA output  
OUT ch2 4mA output  
OUT ch2 20mA output  
OUT ch3 4mA output  
OUT ch3 20mA output  
Previous adjustment  
value  
Notes: 1. Items No. is shown on the PROG display.  
2. Sub item No. is shown on the SEG display.  
3. Item 0: Function check item  
4. Items 1, 2 and 6 : Calibration items  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
While pressing FUNC , press  
and  
simultaneously.  
ENT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
&
&
PROG  
SEG  
PROG  
SEG  
Function test  
PV input  
calibration item  
0 1 0 0  
0 0 0 0  
0.0.0.0.  
1.0.1.1.  
*
*
AdJS  
AdJS  
SETUP  
SETUP  
PROG  
SEG  
PROG  
SEG  
Key test  
Gain No. selection  
Key ON/OFF  
Key ON/OFF  
SETUP  
0 1 0 1  
0 0 0 1  
00000  
*
AdJS  
SETUP  
PROG  
SEG  
PROG  
SEG  
Current input  
count No.  
Display test  
Zero input count  
ON/OFF of display  
ON/OFF of display  
0 1 0 2  
Current count No.  
stored  
After stabilized,  
ENTER  
SETUP  
press  
.
SETUP  
PROG  
SEG  
PROG  
SEG  
Current input  
count No.  
DI test  
Span input count  
DI ON/OFF  
0 0 0 3  
0 0 0 3  
Current count No.  
stored  
After stabilized,  
ENTER  
SETUP  
press  
.
SETUP  
PROG  
SEG  
Input of Control  
output ON/OFF  
Control output test  
Relay Voltage pulse  
0 0 0 4  
SETUP  
PROG  
SEG  
Input of DO  
ON/OFF  
Do output test  
0 0 0 5  
SETUP  
Notes: *; 1. This display shows the digits shown in the previous indication.  
2. If wrong key operation is made when moving from one to another item, the display is returned  
to the initial status of calibration mode. But, the mode is still in the calibration mode.  
Figure 11-1. Calibration Flowchart (1/2)  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
ENTER  
&
PROG  
SEG  
PROG  
SEG  
C/J sensor  
calibration item  
Current item  
calibration item  
0 4 0 0  
0 2 0 0  
2.0.2.2.  
4.0.4.4.  
*
*
AdJS  
AdJS  
SETUP  
SETUP  
PROG  
SEG  
PROG  
SEG  
CJ zero input count  
After stabilized,  
Current output  
count value  
Current input  
count No.  
OUT CH1  
4mA count  
0 2 0 1  
0 4 0 1  
Current count No.  
stored  
Current count  
value stored  
press ENTER  
.
ENTER  
&
SETUP  
SETUP  
PROG  
SEG  
PROG  
SEG  
CJ count  
Current output  
count value  
OUT CH1  
20mA count  
Current count  
0 2 0 2  
0 4 0 2  
ENTER  
&
Current count  
stored  
Current count  
value stored  
ENTER  
&
SETUP  
SETUP  
PROG  
SEG  
PROG  
SEG  
Current input  
resistance  
Current output  
count value  
CJ temperature  
OUT CH3  
20mA count  
0 4 0 6  
0 2 0 3  
ENTER  
Current resistance  
stored  
Current count  
value stored  
&
ENTER  
&
SETUP  
Figure 11-1. Calibration Flowchart (2/2)  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
11-2 Calibration Procedures  
Enter calibration mode  
(1) Release keylock. (PARA LoC=0 and PrtC=0)  
(2) Press DISP key to permit ordinary indication condition.  
Change to READY (RUN and HLD are off) and AUTO (MAN off) modes.  
The following LEDs will illuminate after the above operations.  
RUN LED is OFF  
HLD LED is OFF  
MAN LED is OFF  
PROG Display  
 (Program No. Display)  
SEG Display  
 (Segment No. Display)  
PROG  
SEG  
PV  
SP  
OUT  
TM  
CYC  
CH1  
CH2  
Upper Display  
Lower Display  
RUN  
HLD  
MAN  
PRG  
PROFILE  
BAT AT OT1 OT2 OT3  
EV1 EV2 EV3 T1  
PROG  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
DISP  
RUN/HOLD  
FUNC  
A/M  
AT  
PARA  
CLR  
LOADER  
ENT  
Figure 11-2.  
(3) To enter calibration mode, hold down the FUNC key, and press ENT key and ↓  
key simultaneously.  
The display will show the symbols described in Figure 11-3. If the indication is dif-  
ferent, repeat the above procedure after pushing DISP key to refresh the display.  
(4) To select individual calibration items, press , , , or keys to select the item  
by scrolling, then PARA key, and ENT key.  
The order of calibration items is described in Table 11-2.  
00 00  
PROG  
SEG  
PV  
SP  
OUT  
TM  
CYC  
CH1  
CH2  
0.0.0.0.  
A.d.J.S.  
RUN  
HLD  
MAN  
PRG  
PROFILE  
BAT AT OT1 OT2 OT3  
EV1 EV2 EV3 T1  
PROG  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
DISP  
RUN/HOLD  
FUNC  
A/M  
AT  
PARA  
CLR  
LOADER  
ENT  
Figure 11-3.  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
Function test  
Press , , , or keys to show (0.0.0.0) on upper display, then press ENT key.  
Key test (00-01)  
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-01).  
When you press each key, the data appears in the upper display (shown in Table 11-3).  
Table 11-3. Upper Display  
Key  
Data  
Key  
Data  
PROG  
RUN/HOLD  
0.0.4.0.  
4.0.0.0.  
FUNC  
CLR  
A/M  
AT  
0.0.2.0.  
0.0.0.4.  
0.0.0.8.  
0.8.0.0.  
0.0.0.1.  
0.1.0.0.  
0.2.0.0.  
0.0.1.0.  
1.0.0.0.  
ENT  
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS  
1. When you press DISP key, calibration mode will be exited.  
2. When you press PARA key, the next calibration menu will be entered  
(Display test).  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
Display test (00-02)  
Press PARA key until the display test starts.  
Then, each 7-segment LED, LED indicators and LCD illuminates at every 0.5 sec.  
This is to check if each LED/LCD illuminates.  
Digital input test (00-03)  
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-03).  
When you turn on or off each remote switch, the upper display will show the data  
described in Table 11-4.  
Table 11-4. DI  
DI  
(21) (22) (23) (24) (41) (42) (43) (44) (45) (46) (47) (48)  
Terminal  
Number  
Upper  
Display  
(25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25)  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
0.0.0.0.  
0.0.0.1.  
0.0.0.2.  
0.0.0.4.  
0.0.0.8.  
0.0.1.0.  
0.0.2.0.  
0.0.4.0.  
0.0.8.0.  
0.1.0.0.  
0.2.0.0.  
0.4.0.0.  
0.8.0.0.  
Notes: 1. “ON” means to short the terminals by a jumper.  
2. “—” means to open the terminals.  
Example:  
(21)  
= Short (21) and (25) terminals.  
(25)  
ON  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
Digital output test for control output (00-04)  
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-04).  
When the digit of upper display is changed by , , , or keys, the state of voltage  
pulse or relay control output is changed as shown in Table 11-5.  
Since the 6D hardware is of voltage pulse output (0D and 2G hardware is of relay) spec-  
ification, the ON/OFF check must be performed in meeting with the specification.  
Table 11-5.  
Upper Display  
State  
0.0.0.0.  
All OFF  
6D, 0D, 2G output  
CH1 ON  
0.0.0.1.  
0.0.0.2.  
0.0.0.4.  
6D, 2G output  
CH2 ON  
6D output  
CH3 ON  
Digital output test for event (00-05)  
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-05).  
Table 11-6. DO  
DO  
Terminal  
Number  
(4) (6) (8) (49) (50) (51) (52) (53)  
Upper  
Display  
(5) (7) (9) (55) (55) (55) (55) (55)  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
0.0.0.0.  
0.0.0.1.  
0.0.0.2.  
0.0.0.4.  
0.0.0.8.  
0.0.1.0.  
0.0.2.0.  
0.0.4.0.  
0.0.8.0.  
Notes: 1. “—” in the table means OFF.  
2. Since the DO hardware is of open collector specification, the ON/OFF check must be performed in  
meeting with the specification.  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
PV calibration  
Scroll , , , or keys to show (1.0.1.1.) on upper display, then press ENT  
key.  
Gain No. select  
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-01). Connect calibration  
device (See Section “11-3 Set Up).  
Input the gain number (See Table 11-9 and Table 11-10) by scrolling , , , or →  
keys the upper display ( ENT key not required).  
PV zero, span  
(1) PV zero adjustment  
(a) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-02).  
(b) Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 0% range value  
(See Table 11-9), the signal need to be on the input for 10 to 15 seconds.  
(c) Press ENT key after display stabilizes.  
(2) PV span adjustment  
(a) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-03).  
(b) Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 100% range value  
(See Table 11-9 and table 11-10).  
(c) Press ENT key after display stabilizes.  
Table 11-9.  
Gain No. PV Input 0% PV Input 100% Connecting Position  
0
1
12.785mV  
8.565mV  
13.788mV  
12.000mV  
1.000mV  
0.100V  
110.000mV Between 34(+) and 33()  
58.303mV  
40.481mV  
23.300mV  
11.000mV  
1.100V  
Between 34(+) and 33()  
Between 34(+) and 33()  
Between 34(+) and 33()  
Between 34(+) and 33()  
Between 34(+) and 33()  
Between 34(+) and 33()  
Between 34(+) and 33()  
Between 34(+) and 33()  
Between 34 and 33  
2
3
4
5
6
0.500V  
5.500V  
7
1.000V  
11.000V  
8
0.000mA  
10.000  
10.000Ω  
0.000Ω  
22.000mA  
480.000Ω  
178.000Ω  
110.000Ω  
45.000Ω  
9
10  
11  
12  
Between 34 and 33  
Between 34 and 33  
0.000Ω  
Between 34 and 33  
Table 11-10.  
Gain No. PV Input 0% PV Input 100% Connecting Position  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
8.000mV  
20.000mV  
1.000V  
20.000mV  
70.500mV  
11.000V  
Between 28(+) and 29()  
Between 28(+) and 29()  
Between 27(+) and 26()  
Between 30 and 29  
10.000Ω  
0.000Ω  
380.000Ω  
110.000Ω  
Between 30 and 29  
11-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
Table 11-11.  
Range Table of CH1 TC  
Range Table of CH1 RTD  
Type Code Range No. Gain No.  
Range No.  
Group  
Type  
K (CA)  
Code  
K09  
K08  
K04  
K29  
K44  
K46  
E08  
J08  
Gain No.  
Group  
0
1
2
3
1
3
3
0
1
3
3
3
3
2
2
4
0
1
1
2
0
4
F50  
F46  
F32  
F36  
F38  
F33  
F05  
F03  
F01  
P50  
P46  
P32  
P36  
P38  
P33  
P05  
P03  
P01  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
9
9
1
K (CA)  
2
K (CA)  
9
3
K (CA)  
9
JIS 89 Pt100  
(IEC Pt100)  
4
K (CA)  
10  
10  
9
5
K (CA)  
6
E (CRC)  
J (IC)  
7
9
RTD  
8
T/C  
T (CC)  
T44  
B18  
R16  
S16  
W23  
W14  
D19  
Z13  
U13  
Y13  
Z08  
Z07  
Z06  
10  
9
9
B (PR30-6)  
R (PR13)  
S (PR10)  
W (WRe5-26)  
W (WRe5-26)  
PR40-20  
Ni-NiMo  
N
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
9
9
JIS 89 JPt100  
9
10  
10  
9
9
PL II  
10  
DIN U  
Range Table of CH1 Linear  
DIN L  
Gain No.  
Group  
Type  
Code  
C01  
C08  
M01  
L02  
L01  
L04  
L08  
V01  
L05  
L07  
Range No.  
FeAu-Cr  
8
8
4
3
0
5
5
6
6
7
Linear mA  
4 to 20mA  
0 to 20mA  
0 to 10mA  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
Range Table of CH2 T/C  
Gain No.  
Range No.  
Group  
Type  
Code  
K44  
16  
17  
T/C  
K (CA)  
K (CA)  
128  
129  
Linear mV 10 to +10mV  
0 to +100mV  
K29  
0 to 1V  
Range Table of CH2 RTD  
Linear V  
1 to 1V  
1 to 5V  
0 to 5V  
0 to 10V  
Gain No.  
Range No.  
Group  
RTD  
Type  
Code  
F36  
19  
19  
19  
19  
160  
161  
176  
177  
JIS 89 Pt100  
(IEC Pt100)  
F01  
P36  
P01  
JIS 89 JPt100  
Range Table of CH2 Linear  
Gain No.  
Group  
Type  
Code  
L07  
Range No.  
192  
0 to 10V  
0 to 5V  
18  
18  
Linear V  
V01  
193  
11-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
Cold junction sensor calibration  
Scroll , , , or keys to show (2.0.2.2.) on upper display, then press ENT  
key.  
The cold junction input 0%  
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-01).  
(2) Press ENT key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower display.  
The cold junction AD count data  
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-02).  
(2) Press ENT key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower display.  
The cold junction temperature data  
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-03).  
(2) Connect the thermometer (55).  
(3) Scroll , , , or keys to set above temperature value(°C).  
(4) Press ENT key.  
Current output calibration  
Scroll , , , or keys to show (4.0.4.4.) on the upper display, then press ENT  
key.  
Connect the digital ammeter across terminals (See Figure 11-9).  
OUT CH1 output calibration  
(1) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (04-01).  
Scroll , , , or keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENT key.  
(2) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (04-02).  
Scroll , , , or keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENT key.  
OUT CH2 output calibration  
(1) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-03).  
Scroll , , , or keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENT key.  
(2) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-04).  
Scroll , , , or keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENT key.  
OUT CH1 output calibration  
(1) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (04-05).  
Scroll , , , or keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENT key.  
(2) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (04-06).  
Scroll , , , or keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENT key.  
11-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
11-3 Set Up  
PV  
CH1  
PV  
CH2  
PV  
CH1  
PV  
CH2  
34 33  
28 29  
34 33 32  
30 29 28  
Copper  
leads  
Copper  
leads  
+
+
Millivolt sources  
Millivolt sources  
Decade resistance box Decade resistance box  
Gain No. 0 to 7  
Gain No. 16 to 17  
Gain No. 9 to 10  
Gain No. 19  
PV  
CH1  
PV  
CH2  
PV  
CH1  
PV  
CH2  
34 33 32  
30 29 28  
34 33 32  
30 29 28  
Copper  
leads  
Copper  
leads  
Decade resistance box Decade resistance box  
Decade resistance box Decade resistance box  
Gain No. 11 to 12(0%)  
Gain No. 20(0%)  
Gain No. 11 to 12(100%)  
Gain No. 20(100%)  
PV  
CH1  
PV  
CH2  
33 31  
26 27  
Copper  
leads  
Copper  
leads  
+
-
+
Signal generators 420mA  
Millivolt sources  
Gain No. 8  
Gain No. 18  
11-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  
OUT  
CH1  
OUT  
CH2  
OUT  
CH3  
11 12 14 15 17 18  
Copper  
leads  
+
+
+
Digital ammeter  
Figure 11-11. Current Outputs  
11-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EN2I-6026  
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS  
To reduce risk of electric shock which could cause personal injury, all safety notices in  
this documentation.  
This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where hazardous live voltages  
may be accessible.  
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection  
provided by the equipment must be impaired.  
Do not replace any component (or part) not explicity specified as replaceable by your  
supplier.  
All wiring must be in accordance with local norms and carried out by authorized experienced  
personnel.  
The ground terminal must be connected before any other wiring (and disconnected last).  
A switch in the main supply is required near the equipment.  
Mains power supply wiring requires a (T) 1.0A, 250V fuse(s).(IEC127)  
EQUIPMENT RATINGS  
Supply voltages  
Frequency  
100 to 240Vac (operation power voltages 90 to 264Vac)  
50/60Hz  
Power or current ratings  
30VA maximum  
EQUIPMENT CONDITIONS  
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors. Operation of any  
electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard.  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Vibration  
0 to 50℃  
10 to 90%RH  
Frequency 10 to 60Hz  
Acceleration 1.96m/s maximum  
2
Installation category  
Pollution degree  
Category II (IEC664-1, EN61010-1)  
2
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION  
The controller must be mounted into a panel to limit operator access to the rear terminal.  
Specification of common mode voltage; The common mode voltages of all I/O except for main  
supply and relay outputs are less than 30Vrms, 42.4V peak and 60Vdc.  
APPLICABLE STANDARDS  
EN61010-1, EN50081-2, EN50082-2, EN61326  
CAUTION  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.  
Dispose of used batterries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
2 degrees of freedom PID selection•  
7-12  
7-15  
7-15  
7-15  
7-15  
4-18  
4-17  
Position-proportional output (2G)  
Relay output (0D)  
3-position control deviation lower limit  
3-position control deviation upper limit  
Voltage output (6D)  
3-position control lower limit hysteresis  
3-position control upper limit hysteresis  
Control/output state LED  
Controller function  
Controller status events  
CPL communications•  
CPL communications port selection  
2-2, 2-3  
5-16  
3-wire system RS-485 mutual connection  
5-wire system RS-485 mutual connection  
5-5  
1-4  
7-39  
-A-  
CR filter  
Crimped terminal  
Cycle  
3-4  
4-4  
Accessories•  
Add-on terminal base•  
Add-on terminal layout  
ADV (advance)  
Alarm code  
AUTO (automatic)  
Auto-tuning (AT)  
10-7  
2-1  
4-7  
5-9, 8-11  
5-14  
9-2  
5-12, 5-14  
-D-  
Data structure  
Data types  
1-3  
5-1  
6-11  
7-33  
7-33  
7-33  
7-33  
4-11  
DC current input  
DC voltage input•  
Displays  
Dust-proof covers  
2-9, 4-8  
2-9, 4-8  
Auxiliary output 1 lower limit•  
Auxiliary output 1 upper limit•  
Auxiliary output 2 lower limit•  
Auxiliary output 2 upper limit•  
2-2  
3-4  
-E-  
Auxiliary outputs (outputs 2, 3)  
END  
Event 1 ON delay time  
Event 1 standby  
Event 2 ON delay time  
Event 2 stand by  
Event 3 ON delay time  
Event 3 standby  
5-12  
7-22  
7-22  
7-22  
7-22  
7-22  
7-22  
7-18  
-B-  
Basic display state•  
2-2  
6-2  
1-2  
Basic display selection  
Basic function block diagram  
Basic indicator LED lamps  
BAT (Low voltage battery LED)  
2-2, 2-3  
2-2, 2-3  
Battery Life  
9-13  
9-10  
Event configuration data settings  
Event LEDs  
Event output (relay output) connection  
Events 1 to 3  
External dimensions  
External switch inputs connection  
External switch operation  
Battery replacing  
2-2, 2-3  
4-12  
5-3, 8-6  
3-1, 10-8  
4-15  
6-8  
Body  
2-1  
-C-  
Cable•  
Case  
4-3  
2-1  
Cold junction compensation  
Communications connection  
7-34  
4-16  
-F-  
Console  
2-1, 2-2, 2-4  
5-11, 5-13  
7-42  
6-5, 6-6  
4-9  
FAST (fast forward)  
Feedback resistor•  
5-12, 5-14  
Constant-value operation•  
4-9  
2-7  
Constant-value operation data setting  
Constant-value operation display•  
Functions using two or more keys  
-G-  
Control outputs (outputs 1, 2) connection  
Current output (5G)  
G.Soak (guarantee soak)  
5-8, 8-10  
G.Soak time-out  
General reset  
8-10  
8-15  
Heat/cool output (3D)  
Heat/cool output (5K)  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ground  
4-6  
-O-  
ON-OFF control differential  
Optional parts  
7-13  
10-7  
5-18  
-H-  
Hard dust-proof cover set  
Heat/cool control dead zone  
HOLD  
How to use PARA key  
3-1, 10-7, 10-9  
7-13  
5-12, 5-14  
Output processing functions  
Auxiliary output  
Control output  
7-4  
SP output  
-I-  
-P-  
Input 1 connection  
4-8  
Panel cutout dimensions  
Parameters set up  
Pattern link  
Patterns  
PID operation initial MV  
PID operation initialization  
PID set automatic switching  
3-2  
7-1  
Input 1 square root extraction dropout  
7-33  
7-38  
5-17  
Input 1 Zener barrier adjustment  
5-10, 8-12  
5-2, 8-5  
Input processing functions  
Input Type and Range No.  
2-8  
7-11  
7-11  
Inputs and outputs isolation  
4-19  
5-8  
8-9  
5-8  
-K-  
PID set No.  
Key cover  
Key lock  
Keys  
2-1  
7-10  
2-4  
PID set selection  
Position-proportional control dead zone  
7-13  
Power ON operation•  
Power supply connection  
Profile display  
Program end  
Program No. display•  
Program operation  
Program operation display  
Program patterns•  
Program patterns selection  
6-1  
4-6  
-L-  
2-2, 2-3  
5-14  
2-2  
5-11, 5-13  
6-3, 6-4, 6-5  
1-3, 5-2  
6-7  
Loader jack•  
Lock screw  
Lower display  
2-4, 2-7  
2-1  
2-2, 2-3  
-M-  
MANUAL  
MANUAL operation  
Mode indicator LED lamps  
5-12, 5-14  
6-11  
2-2, 2-3  
Program protect•  
7-10  
5-16  
8-14  
8-12  
Programmer function  
Mode transition  
Mode types  
5-13  
5-11  
Program copy•  
Program deletion•  
Program set up  
PV display  
PV start  
PV type events  
Model selection guide  
1-5  
9-8  
8-1  
7-34  
5-9, 8-11  
Motor adjustment is impossible  
Motor control method selection  
7-16  
Motor valve opening adjustment fully  
open/close time  
Motor valve opening automatic adjustment  
Mounting bracket  
Mounting locations  
Mounting method  
MV change limit  
5-3  
7-17  
7-17  
-R-  
3-1, 3-5, 10-7  
Range No.  
2-8  
3-3  
3-5  
READY  
RESET  
5-11  
5-14  
7-11  
Resistance temperature detector (RTD)  
RS-485 connection  
2-8, 4-7  
4-16  
-N-  
Noise•  
3-4  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
-S-  
Segment No. display  
2-2  
Segment deletion  
Segment insertion  
8-13  
8-13  
Self-diagnostics  
Setup data setting  
Smart-tuning method selection  
Soft dust-proof cover set  
9-1  
7-27  
7-12  
3-1, 10-7, 10-9  
SP1 lower limit  
SP1 upper limit  
7-33  
7-33  
7-37  
10-1  
Special functions•  
Specifications•  
Standard terminal base  
Standard terminal layout  
System configuration  
2-1  
4-7  
1-4  
-T-  
Table data settings  
7-40  
3-1, 10-7, 10-9  
4-4  
2-8, 4-8  
6-4, 7-34  
Time event output (open-collector) connection 4-13  
Terminal cover set  
Terminals connection•  
Thermocouple inputs  
Time display  
Time event outputs  
Time events 1 to 5 selection•  
Time events  
Trouble during key entry  
1-2  
5-6  
5-5, 5-6  
9-3  
-U-  
Upper display  
2-2, 2-3  
-V-  
Variable parameter settings  
Varister  
7-7  
3-4  
Voltage output 1 adjustment  
Voltage output 2 adjustment  
7-35  
7-35  
7-34  
Voltage time-proportional output system•  
-W-  
Wiring  
4-1  
9-8  
Wiring for reverse motor rotation•  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Revision History  
Printed Manual Number  
Date  
Edition  
Revised pages  
Description  
99-04 EN1I-6197  
00-06  
1st Edition  
2nd Edition iv  
Instruction Manual.was changed to User's Manual  
SERVICE CENTERS Address of JAPAN was changed  
00-08  
3rd Edition 7-32  
No. 84 and No. 85 Items was changed  
PV Input 100% of Gain No. 1 and Gain No. 8 was  
changed  
11-10  
01-06  
03-06  
4th Edition 7-32  
No. 94  
Unused  
PID type changed  
5th Edition 8-4  
G.Soak time-out added  
Setting up G.Soak time-out items added  
Applicable standards added, EN61326  
8-10  
10-6, SAFETY  
REQUIREMENTS  
Programming  
G.Soak time-out added  
Map Draft Form  
03-08  
04-02  
6th Edition 4-3  
Fujikura Cable Co. Fujikura Ltd.  
Handling Precautions added, to connect SG  
terminals each others.  
Setting range: 0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s) added.  
ON time setting + 0.1 to 599.9 (0.1s) added.  
Setting range changed “0 to 1000U” to “0.00 to  
99.59 (h:min/min:s) or 0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)” in  
G. Soak time-out items.  
4-17, 4-18  
8-5, 8-7, 8-8  
8-7, 8-8  
8-10  
Index-1 to 3  
Allover revised.  
7th Edition 4-2  
The 8th item of Handling Precautions added.  
Item of Altitude added.  
10-6  
10-6, 1 to 11  
Description change based on the European  
standards revision.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS  
NETHERLANDS  
NORWAY  
HONEYWELL BV  
HONEYWELL A/S  
Askerveien 61  
PO Box 263  
Laaderhoogtweg 18  
NL-1101 EA AMSTERDAM ZO  
THE NETHERLANDS  
Tel.:31 20 56 56 911  
N-1371 ASKER  
NORWAY  
Tel.:47 66 90 20 30  
POLAND  
HONEYWELL Ltd  
UI Augustowka 3  
PL-02981 WARSAW  
POLAND  
PORTUGAL  
HONEYWELL PORTUGAL LDA  
Edificio Suecia II  
Av.do Forte nr 3-Piso 3  
CARNAXIDE  
Tel.:48 2 642 25 70  
2795 LINDA A VELHA  
PORTUGAL  
Tel.:351 4172 602  
REPUBLIC OF IRELAND  
HONEYWELL  
Unit 5  
Long Mile Road  
DUBLIN 12  
Republic of Ireland  
Tel.:353 1 565944  
REP.OF SINGAPORE  
HONEYWELL PTE LTD.  
BLOCK 750E CHAI CHEE ROAD  
06-01 CHAI CHEE IND.PARK  
1646 SINGAPORE  
RUSSIA  
REP OF SINGAPORE  
Tel.:65 449 7609  
HONEYWELL INC  
Tryokhprundny Pereulok 11.13  
SU 10 3001 MOSCOW  
Tel.:7095 29 92 531  
SLOVAK REPUBLIC  
HONEYWELL  
Trnavska 3  
SOUTH AFRICA  
HONEYWELL LTD  
34 Harry Street  
831 04 BRATISLAVA  
SLOVAKIA  
Tel.:42 7 601 23  
Robertsham  
JOHANNESBURG 2001  
REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA  
Tel.:27 11 680 3440  
SPAIN  
HONEYWELL  
Josefa Valcarcel, 24  
PO Box 29106  
28080 MADRID  
SPAIN  
SWEDEN  
HONEYWELL A.B.  
Storsatragrand 5  
S-127 86 STOCKHOLM  
SWEDEN  
Tel.:34 1 32 02 112  
SWITZERLAND  
HONEYWELL A.G.  
Hertistrasse 2  
Tel.:46 8 775 55 00  
UNITED KINGDOM  
HONEYWELL HOUSE  
Charles Square  
8304 WALLISELLEN  
SWITZERLAND  
Tel.:41 1 839 2525  
BRACKNELL, BERKS. RG12 1EB  
UNITED KINGDOM  
Tel.:44 344 424 555  
U.S.A  
HONEYWELL INC  
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS DIV.  
1100 VIRGINIA DRIVE  
PA 19034-3260 FT.WASHINGTON  
U.S.A  
VENEZUELA  
HONEYWELL CA  
APARTADO 61314  
1060 CARACAS  
VENEZUELA  
Tel.:215 641 3000  
Tel.:58 2 239 7533  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS  
ASIA PACIFIC  
HONEYWELL ASIA PACIFIC Inc.  
Room 3213-3225  
ARGENTINA  
HONEYWELL S.A.I.C.  
BELGRANO 1156  
BUENOS AIRES  
ARGENTINA  
Sun Kung Kai Centre  
No 30 Harbour Road  
WANCHAI  
Tel.:54 1 383 9290  
HONG KONG  
Tel.:852 829 82 98  
AUSTRALIA  
HONEYWELL LIMITED  
5 Thomas Holt Drive  
North Ryde Sydney  
NSW AUSTRALIA 2113  
Tel.:61 2 353 7000  
AUSTRIA  
HONEYWELL AUSTRIA G.m.b.H.  
Handelskai 388  
A1020 VIENNA  
AUSTRIA  
Tel.:43 1 213 300  
BELGIUM  
HONEYWELL S.A.  
Avenue de Schipol, 3  
1140 BRUSSELS  
BELGIUM  
BRAZIL  
HONEYWELL DO BRAZIL AND CIA  
Rua Jose Alves Da Chunha  
Lima 172  
Tel.:32 2 728 27 11  
BUTANTA  
05360 SAO PAULO SP  
BRAZIL  
Tel.:55 11 819 3755  
CANADA  
HONEYWELL LIMITED  
THE HONEYWEEL CENTRE  
155 GORDON BAKER RD  
M2H 3N7 NORTH YORK, ONTARIO  
CANADA  
CZECHIA  
HONEYWELL PRAGUE  
Krocinovska 3  
Tel.:416 499 6111  
CS16000 PRAGUE 6  
CZECHIA  
Tel.:422 243 10 754  
DENMARK  
HONEYWELL A/S  
Lyngby Hovedgade 98  
2800 LYNGBY  
FINLAND  
HONEYWELL OY  
Ruukintie 8  
DENMARK  
Tel.:45 45 93 56 56  
SF-02320 ESPOO  
FINLAND  
Tel.:358 0 80101  
FRANCE  
HONEYWELL S.A.  
4, Avenue Ampere  
GERMANY  
MONTIGNY LE BRETONNEUX  
F-78886 ST QUENTIN EN YVELINES  
FRANCE  
HONEYWELL AG  
Kaiserleistrasse 39  
Postfach 10 08 65  
D-63067 OFFENBACH/MAIN  
GERMANY  
Tel.:(1) 30 58 80 00  
HUNGARY  
Tel.:49 69 80 640  
HONEYWELL Kft  
Volgy U 30  
ITALY  
H-1026 BUDAPEST  
HUNGARY  
Tel.:36 1 116 76 59  
HONEYWELL S.p.A.  
Via Vittor Pisani, 13  
20124 MILANO  
ITALY  
JAPAN  
Tel.:39 2 67 731  
HONEYWELL KK  
14-6, Shibaura 1-chome,  
Minato-ku, Tokyo 150-0023  
Japan  
MEXICO  
HONEYWELL S.A.DE CV  
AV. CONSTITUYENTES 900  
COL. LOMAS ALTAS  
11950 MEXICO CITY  
MEXICO  
Tel.:81-3-5440-1395  
Tel.:52 5 259 1966  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. CP-UM-5093E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Stereo System CD DH950P User Manual
Shure Range 98H C User Manual
Shure Recording Equipment A15TG User Manual
Sony Computer Drive 1GN User Manual
Sony Home Theater System CMT SX2D User Manual
Star Manufacturing Oven HSCO14 User Manual
State Industries Electric Heater GPG85 540 NEA User Manual
Sterling Plumbing Outdoor Shower 72210106 User Manual
Sub Zero Ventilation Hood I663418R User Manual
Symphonic DVD VCR Combo CWF803 User Manual